OM47509U

User Manual: 2005 Toyota Prius Owners Manual | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 336 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

FEATURES ON NEW TOYOTA VEHICLE

Overview of instruments and controls

Instrument panel overvieww 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument cluster and multi−information display overview 5. . . . . . . .

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel and multi−information

display 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1– 1

Instrument panel overview

1. Side vents 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Side defroster outlets

3. Instrument cluster 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. Center vents 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. Glove boxes 193. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. Power door lock switches 39. . . . . . . . .

7. Power window switches 42. . . . . . . . . . .

8. Auxiliary boxes 197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9. Cup holders 198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10. Tilt steering lock release lever 96. . . . .

11. Hood lock release lever 44. . . . . . . . . . .

12. Parking brake pedal 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13. Power rear view mirror

control switch 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14. Window lock switch 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11p003d

1. Headlight and turn signal

switches 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Wiper and washer switches 109. . . . . . .

3. “POWER” switch 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. Clock 192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. Multi−information display or

navigation system including

multi−information display

(For the navigation system,

see the separate “Navigation

System Owner’s Manual”.) 146. . . . . . . .

6. Emergency flasher switch 106. . . . . . . . .

7. Trip meter reset button 115. . . . . . . . . . .

8. Km/h or MPH button 116. . . . . . . . . . . . .

9. Audio system 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10. Power outlet 192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11. “P” position switch 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12. Electronic shift lever

(R, N, D, B) 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13. Key slot 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14. Cruise control switch 142. . . . . . . . . . . . .

15. Smart entry and start system

cancel switch 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16. Climate remote control

switches 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11p001h

17. Instrument panel light control

dial 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18. Audio remote control switches 173. . . .

1. Service reminder indicators

and indicator lights 117, 124. . . . . . . . . .

2. Fuel gauge 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. Speedometer

4. Odometer and trip meter 115. . . . . . . . .

Instrument cluster and multi−information display overview

11p002i

Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster and Multi−information display

and

Brake system warning lights∗1

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

Low fuel level indicator light∗1

Open door warning light∗1

Master warning light∗1

Anti−lock brake system warning light∗1

SRS warning light∗1

Engine oil replacement reminder light∗1

(for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

Vehicle stability control system warning light∗1

Discharge warning light∗2

High coolant temperature warning light∗2

Low engine oil pressure warning light∗2

Hybrid vehicle battery warning light∗2

Electric power steering system warning light∗2

(U.S.A)

(Canada)

Hybrid vehicle immobilizer / Theft deterrent sys-

tem indicator light

Tail light indicator light

Shift position indicator light∗4

Driving ready light

Automatic air conditioner indicator light

Recirculate mode indicator light

Smart entry and start system warning light∗5

Windshield air flow indicator light

Slip indicator light

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defog-

gers indicator light

Low temperature indicator light

Headlight high beam indicator light

Headlight indicator light

Turn signal indicator lights

∗1: For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning

buzzers— —Instrument cluster” on page 117.

∗2: For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning

buzzers— —Multi−information display” on page 124.

∗3: If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 142.

∗4: For details, see “Hybrid transaxle” on page 136.

∗5: For details, see “Smart entry and start system” on page 24.

Cruise control indicator light∗3

Hybrid system warning light∗2

Automatic head light leveling system

warning light∗2

FEATURES ON NEW TOYOTA VEHICLE

Toyota hybrid system

Toyota hybrid systemm 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Toyota hybrid system operating condition 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Starting your vehicle 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For efficient use of your vehicle 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Precautions for use 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1– 2

Toyota hybrid system combines a gaso-

line engine and electric motor power to

improve the fuel economy and minimize

the emissions as well as to provide

better power performance than the ordi-

nary gasoline−powered vehicles.

Depending on the driving condition, the

vehicle runs on the best combination of;

DGasoline engine power

DElectric motor power generated by

the gasoline engine

DElectric motor power of the hybrid

vehicle battery

Furthermore, the energy is efficiently used

in the following ways:

DWhen stopping the vehicle, the gaso-

line engine is automatically stopped.

DWhen applying the brakes or decelerat-

ing, electricity is converted from the

turning force of the wheels and stored

in the hybrid vehicle battery. (This is

called regenerative brake.)

Since the battery is charged by the

gasoline engine as needed, it does not

require charging from an outside

source like an electric vehicle.

If you do not use the vehicle for a

long time (2 weeks or more), the hy-

brid vehicle battery and auxiliary battery

will discharge and their condition is li-

able to decline. Therefore, in order to

make up for discharging, charge them

once in every 2 weeks for about 30

minutes by starting the hybrid system

with all electrical components turned off.

Basic operations are described below. Be-

sides, Toyota hybrid system performs vari-

ous controls depending on the operating

condition: The “Energy Monitor” screen

tells you which power is used currently.

Toyota hybrid system Toyota hybrid system

operating condition

12p016c

Electric power

in use

When starting or backing up, etc., the

vehicle runs on electric power from hybrid

vehicle battery, because the gasoline en-

gine efficiency is low.

12p017c

Gasoline power

in use

During normal driving, the vehicle runs

mainly on gasoline power. However, the

electric motor, using electric power gener-

ated by the gasoline engine, can supple-

ment the gasoline engine power.

The vehicle controls the optimum ratio of

the gasoline and electric power to help

use energy more efficiently.

12p018c

Electric and gasoline

power in use

When driving at full throttle, additional

electric power is applied from the hybrid

vehicle battery. Vehicle performance impro-

ves.

12p019c

Storing electric power

When decreasing speed or applying the

brakes, the turning force of the wheels

makes the electric motor operate as a

generator and additional electricity is

stored in the hybrid vehicle battery (regen-

erative brake).

12p020c

Not in use

When stopping, the gasoline engine auto-

matically shuts off.

12p030b

Charging hybrid vehicle battery

When the hybrid vehicle battery power is

insufficient, the gasoline engine charges

the hybrid vehicle battery. The system al-

ways supplies electricity at a constant lev-

el.

Your vehicle is equipped with push but-

ton start system. The hybrid system

will start automatically by pressing the

“POWER” switch briefly with the brake

pedal depressed.

With smart function

1. Carry the key with you.

2. Press the “POWER” switch briefly with

the brake pedal depressed.

Without smart function

1. Insert the key.

2. Press the “POWER” switch briefly with

the brake pedal depressed.

The “READY” light flashes and stays on.

Two beeps sound after a few seconds,

and the hybrid system will start. (If the

ambient temperature is low such as during

winter, it may take time until the “READY”

light comes on.) You cannot start your

vehicle when the brake pedal is not de-

pressed. (For details, see “How to start

the hybrid system—” on page 234.)

The engine may not start even with the

“READY” light on.

Drive your vehicle with a smooth accel-

eration and deceleration.

DWhile driving, energy is recovered

through the regenerative brake as the

vehicle decelerates. However, for more

efficient use, do not accelerate or de-

celerate your vehicle more than neces-

sary.

DAvoid abrupt acceleration and decelera-

tion.

DThe remaining capacity of the hybrid

vehicle battery can be confirmed on

the energy monitor screen of the multi−

information display. See “Information”

on page 150 for details. Gradual or

non−abrupt acceleration or deceleration

will more effectively use the benefits of

an electric motor without having to use

gasoline engine power.

When parking, be sure to put the hy-

brid transaxle in “P”. While driving, use

the hybrid transaxle in “D”.

DIn “N”, the gasoline engine operates

but electricity cannot be generated. The

battery will be discharged requiring un-

necessary engine power to recharge.

DThe hybrid system automatically re-

charges the hybrid vehicle battery

when the remaining battery power is

reduced. However, the charging is not

available if the hybrid transaxle is “N”.

Starting your vehicle For efficient use of your

vehicle

INFORMATION:

The gasoline engine starts and stops

automatically. (It stops during a low

load driving, deceleration or when the

vehicle is stopped.)

If the “READY” light remains on, you

can start your vehicle using the electric

motor even with the gasoline engine

stopped.

The gasoline engine may not stop auto-

matically in the following conditions:

zDuring gasoline engine warm−up

zDuring hybrid vehicle battery charg-

ing

zDuring low or high hybrid vehicle

battery temperature

The vehicle runs in combination with

the gasoline and electric power. Pay

special attention to the following items.

Be careful of high voltage and high

temperature.

Your vehicle is equipped with the orange

colored cables connected to the hybrid

vehicle battery (about 200 V) and to other

components that are all high voltage.

CAUTION

Do not touch or come in contact with

orange cables or battery terminals.

Electric shock may cause serious in-

jury or death. Read all caution labels.

An electric motor, coolant radiator and

some other parts reach high temperature

while driving. Caution labels are applied to

these parts. Carefully observe the instruc-

tions on these caution labels.

CAUTION

Never remove or disassemble any

high voltage part, high voltage cables

(orange color) and their connectors.

It may cause death or serious injury.

12p007d

Inverter unit

Hybrid vehicle battery

Service

plug

High volt-

age cables

Air conditioning

compressor

High voltage

cables

Do not touch the service plug.

The service plug is installed in the left

side trim of the luggage compartment. It

is provided to disable high voltage current

from the hybrid vehicle battery when the

vehicle is in need of repairs at your

Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

DThe shaded parts in the illustration

are subjected to high voltage.

DInappropriate handling may cause

an electric shock resulting in seri-

ous injury or death. Never touch

any item in shaded area.

Precautions for use

These high voltage parts or cables

consisting of an electromagnetic

shielding structure produce relatively

the same amount of electromagnetic

waves as conventional gasoline−

fueled vehicles or home electric ap-

pliances.

As unwanted noise may occur in the

reception of mobile radios, contact

your Toyota dealer for installation or

removal.

Always keep your hybrid vehicle’s driv-

ing characteristics in mind.

CAUTION

The driver should pay full attention

around the vehicle especially when it

is driven only by the electric motor

(with the gasoline engine stopped).

People in the immediate area might

misjudge the hybrid vehicle move-

ment based on the absence of the

regular engine noise.

DAs the vehicle runs with both the gaso-

line engine and electric motor, you may

hear a motor sound coming from the

engine compartment.

DWhen the hybrid system is started or

stopped, you may hear a sound coming

from the hybrid vehicle battery in the

luggage compartment. However, this

does not indicate any trouble.

DIf the “READY” light is on, you can

start even though the gasoline engine

may be off.

DWhen you shift the shift lever to “B”

and release it to its original position

and your foot from the accelerator ped-

al, engine braking will be applied. How-

ever, during high speed driving you

may feel that deceleration by engine

braking is less than that of ordinary

vehicle.

Be sure to put the hybrid transaxle in

“P” when parking.

In “N”, the hybrid vehicle battery assembly

is not charged, even if the gasoline en-

gine is operating. You cannot run your

vehicle if the hybrid transaxle is left in “N”

for a long time because the hybrid vehicle

battery assembly will be discharged.

When you leave your vehicle, apply the

parking brake to put the hybrid trans-

axle in “P” and be sure to carry the

key with you and lock all the doors.

If you leave the hybrid system in “ACC”

or “IG−ON”, the hybrid system may not

start because the auxiliary battery will be

discharged.

CAUTION

DWhen you leave your vehicle, be

sure to shut off the hybrid system.

DBe sure to put the hybrid transaxle

in “P” because the vehicle can start

with the “READY” light on and the

engine stopped (no engine sound

and vibration). When the “READY”

light is on, if you leave your ve-

hicle in shift position other than

“P” and “N”, the vehicle will creep

and start abruptly with the accelera-

tor pedal being depressed by mis-

take. This may cause death or seri-

ous injury.

12p008d

When the multi−information display

shows this message, the master warn-

ing light () comes on in the instru-

ment cluster. Read the message and

follow the instruction.

DWhen you leave your vehicle, or stop

or park for a while, put the hybrid

transaxle in “P”.

DCharging is necessary. In “N”, charging

will not be applied. The electric genera-

tor operates in “P”, “D” or “B”. If you

continue driving, put the hybrid trans-

axle in “D” or “B” and depress the

accelerator pedal. Do not leave the hy-

brid transaxle in “N”. When driving in

traffic jam, operate in “D”.

12P009c

Do not allow anyone to lean against the

side of the rear right seatback, nor put

any luggage or other obstructions on it.

DAn air vent is provided on the side of

the rear right seatback to cool the hy-

brid vehicle battery. If this vent is cov-

ered, the hybrid vehicle battery will

overheat resulting in a reduction of the

output performance of the hybrid sys-

tem.

DThe seat belt not properly set in the

guide on the top of the rear seat may

block the air vent. Be sure to pass the

seat belt through the guide properly.

DDo not wet or put foreign objects over

the air vent. Otherwise, the hybrid ve-

hicle battery may be adversely affected

and be damaged.

DYou may hear a cooling fan noise from

the air vent.

For vehicle repairs or maintenance, be

sure to consult your Toyota dealer.

If your vehicle is beyond repair because

of accident or something, be sure to

consult your Toyota dealer.

As sealed Nickel−Metal hydride batteries

are used, be sure to consult your Toyota

dealer when disposing of your vehicle.

CAUTION

If you are involved in an accident,

follow these precautions.

DMove the vehicle to a safe place

and perform the followings to re-

duce the risk of high voltage elec-

tricity leakage.

DDepress the brake pedal and apply

the parking brake.

DPress the “P” position switch and

stop the hybrid system.

DIf the key is inserted into key slot,

remove it.

DIf your vehicle has experienced ma-

jor damage, you may get an electric

shock. To prevent this, never touch

the high voltage parts (hybrid ve-

hicle battery assembly, etc.) or

cables (orange color) connecting

these parts. If some exposed elec-

tric wires are protruding inside or

outside of the vehicle, an electric

shock may also occur. Never touch

them.

DIf the fluid leaks or gets in some

part of the vehicle, never touch it

because it may be electrolyte

(strong alkali) from the hybrid ve-

hicle battery. If it gets on your skin

or eyes, wash off immediately with

a large amount of water, if possible,

with boric acid solution, and get

immediate medical attention in or-

der to help avoid serious injury.

DIf a vehicle fire occurs, extinguish

it using a fire extinguisher for the

exclusive use on electric fires. As

a small amount of water may be

dangerous, use a large amount of

water, for example from a fire hy-

drant, or wait for a fire−fighting

team arrival.

DIf your vehicle needs to be towed,

do it with the front wheels or all

four wheels raised. If the front

wheels are on the ground when

towing, the electric motor may con-

tinue to generate electricity which

could leak electricity. A fire could

occur depending on the degree of

damage. See “If your vehicle needs

to be towed” on page 258.

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Keys and Doors

Keys 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hybrid vehicle immobilizer system 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Smart entry and start system 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wireless remote control 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Side doors 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Back door 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power windows 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hood 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Theft deterrent system 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel tank cap 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2– 1

Keys

21p001a

1. Master keys with silver ornament (Ve-

hicles equipped with smart entry and

start system)—These keys work in ev-

ery lock. Your Toyota dealer will need

one of them to make a new key with

a built−in transponder chip. Before you

use these keys, be sure to read “Smart

entry and start system” on page 24.

2. Master keys without silver ornament

(Vehicles not equipped with smart entry

and start system)—These keys work in

every lock. Your Toyota dealer will

need one of them to make a new key

with a built−in transponder chip.

3. Mechanical keys (attached to the mas-

ter key)—These key work for the driv-

er’s door only.

21P112

USING A MECHANICAL KEY

When you use the mechanical key in-

cluded on the side of the key, slide the

lock knob in the arrow direction and take

out the key as shown. To put the key

back, slide the lock knob in the arrow

direction and replace the key. Be sure to

put the key back when not in use.

Since the doors can be locked without a

key, you should always carry a spare

master key in case you accidentally lock

your keys inside the vehicle.

NOTICE

When using a key containing a trans-

ponder chip, observe the following

precautions:

zDo not affix any material that cuts

off electromagnetic waves (such as

a metal seal) on the key.

zDo not knock the key hard against

other objects.

zDo not leave the key exposed to

high temperatures for a long period,

such as on the dashboard or hood

under direct sunlight.

zDo not put the key in water or

wash it in an ultrasonic washer.

zDo not keep the key together with

the products emitting electromag-

netic waves such as a cellular

phone.

21p005a

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.

Keep the plate in a safe place such as

your wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if you

need additional keys, duplicates can be

made by a Toyota dealer using the key

number.

We recommend writing down the key num-

ber and storing it in a safe place.

21p113

DEACTIVATION USING THE SMART

FUNCTION

The hybrid vehicle immobilizer system

is a shift prevention system. When you

enter the vehicle carrying a smart key

and press the “POWER” switch, the

electronic code in the key is automati-

cally checked to determine whether it

corresponds to the registered ID code

for the vehicle. If the ID code is veri-

fied, you can start the hybrid system.

21p007b

The system is automatically set when the

hybrid system is off and driver’s door is

opened. The indicator light will start flash-

ing to show the system is set.

If any of the following indicator conditions

occurs, contact your Toyota dealer.

DThe indicator light stays on except

when the theft deterrent system is set-

ting or activating. (See “Theft deterrent

system” on page 45.)

DThe indicator light does not start flash-

ing when the hybrid system is off and

driver’s door is opened.

DThe indicator light flashes inconsistent-

ly.

Hybrid vehicle immobilizer

system

Carrying a smart key and pressing the

“POWER” switch automatically cancels the

system, which enables the hybrid system

to start. The indicator light will go off.

For your Toyota dealer to make you a

new key with built−in transponder chip,

your dealer will need your key number

and master key. However, there is a limit

to the number of additional keys your

Toyota dealer can make for you.

NOTICE

Do not modify, remove or disas-

semble the hybrid vehicle immobilizer

system. If any unauthorized changes

or modifications are made, proper op-

eration of the system cannot be guar-

anteed.

21p006a

DEACTIVATION USING THE KEY

The hybrid vehicle immobilizer system

is a theft prevention system. When you

insert the key in the key slot, the trans-

ponder chip in the key transmits an

electronic code to the vehicle. The hy-

brid system will start only when the

electronic code in the chip corresponds

to the registered ID code for the ve-

hicle.

21p007b

The system is automatically set when the

key is removed from the key slot. The

indicator light will start flashing to show

the system is set.

If any of the following indicator conditions

occurs, contact your Toyota dealer.

DThe indicator light stays on except

when the theft deterrent system is set-

ting or activating. (See “Theft deterrent

system” on page 45.)

DThe indicator light does not start flash-

ing when the key is removed from the

key slot.

DThe indicator light flashes inconsistent-

ly.

Inserting the registered key in the key slot

automatically cancels the system, which

enables the hybrid system to start. The

indicator light will go off.

For your Toyota dealer to make you a

new key with built−in transponder chip,

your dealer will need your key number

and master key. However, there is a limit

to the number of additional keys your

Toyota dealer can make for you.

NOTICE

Do not modify, remove or disas-

semble the hybrid vehicle immobilizer

system. If any unauthorized changes

or modifications are made, proper op-

eration of the system cannot be guar-

anteed.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCC ID: MOZRI−24KTY

MADE IN JAPAN

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS−210 of

industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of

the device.

21p120

1. Locking and unlocking

2. Starting the hybrid system

By carrying a smart key, you can lock

and unlock the doors and start the hy-

brid system.

For locking the doors, see “Locking the

doors with smart function” on page 29.

For unlocking the doors, see “Unlocking

the door(s) with smart function” on page

30. For starting the hybrid system, see

“Push button start system” on page 130.

If the smart key battery is discharged, the

smart function cannot be used. Use the

mechanical key attached to the smart key

by inserting it in the driver’s door keyhole

to lock or unlock door. To start the hybrid

system, insert the smart key into the key

slot. In order to activate the smart func-

tion, the battery should be replaced. For

details, see “—Replacing battery” on page

37.

You can deactivate the smart function by

using the cancel switch. In this case, all

the smart function will be deactivated. For

details, see “Deactivating the smart func-

tion” on page 33.

INFORMATION

DBe sure to take the smart key with

you.

DIn the following cases, the smart

function or wireless remote control

feature may not operate properly. (If

this happens, use a mechanical key

to lock or unlock the driver’s door

and a smart key to start the hybrid

system.)

zWhen facilities issuing strong

electromagnetic waves such as

TV towers, electric power sta-

tions, broadcasting stations are

nearby.

zWhen you are carrying a smart

key together with a mobile com-

munications system such as a

two−way radio or cellular phone.

zWhen the smart key is in contact

with or covered by a metallic ob-

ject.

zWhen another person is operating

a wireless remote control func-

tion on another vehicle near your

vehicle.

Smart entry and start system

DIf you do not drive your vehicle,

store the smart key, keeping it at

least 5 m (16 ft.) away from the ve-

hicle.

ALARMS AND WARNING LIGHT

Your vehicle is equipped with alarms

inside and outside, as well as warning

light in the instrument cluster, that re-

mind you if there is a problem involv-

ing the smart entry and start system.

This warning light will come on when the

“IG−ON” mode is enabled and will go off

after a few seconds.

If an alarm sounds or the warning light

comes on, be sure to check your ve-

hicle and smart key.

(a) The hybrid system was not turned

off and the transaxle was in a posi-

tion other than “P”.

When the driver’s door is opened with the

hybrid system in “ACC” or “IG−ON” and

with the transaxle in a position other than

“P”.

Inside alarm: Beeps continuously

Multi−information display: Warning mes-

sage

Alarms will be turned off by any of the

following operations:

DClosing the driver’s door

DPressing the “P” position switch

DTurning on the hybrid system

DTurning off the hybrid system

(b) The smart key was brought outside

the vehicle with the transaxle in a

position other than “P”.

When the driver’s door is opened or

closed with the hybrid system not to be

turned off and with the transaxle in a

position other than “P”, it is determined

that the smart key is not in the vehicle.

Inside alarm: Beeps continuously

Outside alarm: Beeps continuously

Warning light: On

Alarms will be turned off by any of the

following operations:

DPressing the “P” position switch

DBringing the smart key inside the ve-

hicle

DTurning off the hybrid system

off with the transaxle in “P”.

When the driver’s door is opened with the

hybrid system in “ACC” and with the

transaxle in “P”.

Inside alarm: 3 Beeps

In the “IG−ON” mode, an alarm will not

sound.

(d) The smart key was brought outside

the vehicle.

When the driver’s door is opened or

closed with the hybrid system not to be

turned off (and with the transaxle in “P”),

it is determined that the smart key is not

in the vehicle.

Inside alarm: One beep

Outside alarm: 3 beeps

Warning light: On

(e) Locking with smart function was at-

tempted with the hybrid system not

to be turned off.

When you attempt to lock all the doors

using smart locking function with the hy-

brid system not to be turned off and with

the transaxle in a position other than “P”.

Outside alarm: One beep (sounds for 2

seconds.)

Warning light: On

At this time, the doors cannot be

locked.

(f) The smart key was brought outside

the vehicle.

When a door other than the driver’s door

is opened or closed with the hybrid sys-

tem not to be turned off, it is determined

that the smart key is not in the vehicle.

Inside alarm: One beep

Outside alarm: 3 beeps

Warning light: On

(g) Preventing the key from being

locked inside the vehicle

When you close the door with the hybrid

system off but with the smart key left in

the vehicle, and attempt to lock all the

doors using smart locking function, it is

determined that the smart key is in the

vehicle.

Outside alarm: One beep (sounds for 2

seconds)

INFORMATION

zThis function may not operate when

the smart key is left on the instru-

ment panel, luggage cover, floor or

in the glove box.

zThe function may operate if the

smart key is brought outside but it

is very close to the door window or

door handle.

(h) Low smart key battery

When the hybrid system is turned to

“ACC” or “OFF” about 20 minutes after

the hybrid system is turned on or to “IG−

ON”, it is determined that the smart key

battery voltage is low.

Inside alarm: One beep

(i) Outside of effective range

When the “POWER” switch is pressed, it

is determined that the smart key is not in

the vehicle.

Inside alarm: One beep

Warning light: On (for 5 seconds)

(j) Open door warning

When you attempt to lock all the doors

using smart locking function with the hy-

brid system turned off but with any door

open.

Outside alarm: One beep (sounds for 10

seconds)

Alarms will be turned off by either of

the following operations:

DClosing all the doors

DPressing the unlock button on the

smart key

Warning and its meaning

Inside warning alarm Outside warning alarm Warning light Causes

One beep

(sounds continuously) — — The driver’s door was opened when the hybrid system was in “ACC”

or “IG−ON” and when the transaxle was in a position other than “P”.

One beep

(sounds continuously)

One beep

(sounds continuously) On

The driver brought out the smart key from the vehicle with the hybrid

system not to be turned off and with the transaxle in a position other

than “P”.

Beeps

(sound intermittently) — — The driver’s door was opened when the hybrid system was in “ACC”

and when the transaxle was in “P”.

One beep 3 beeps On The driver brought out the smart key from the vehicle with the hybrid

system not to be turned off and with the transaxle in “P”.

—One beep

(sounds for 2 seconds) On The lock switch was pressed with the hybrid system not to be turned

off and with the transaxle in “P”.

One beep 3 beeps On The passenger brought out the smart key from the vehicle with the

hybrid system not to be turned off.

—One beep

(sounds for 2 seconds) —The lock switch was pressed when the hybrid system was off but with

the smart key left in the vehicle.

One beep — — The key battery voltage become about 2 V. (3 V for normal operation)

One beep —On

(for 5 seconds)

The “POWER” switch was pressed when the smart key was not in the

effective range of the system.

—One beep

(sounds for 10 seconds) —The lock switch was pressed when the hybrid system was off but any

door was opened.

21p128

Side door

21p139

Back door

LOCKING THE DOORS WITH SMART

FUNCTION

The smart entry and start system will

lock the doors without being inserted

into the door keyhole.

When you exit the vehicle carrying the

smart key and push the lock button on the

outside front door handle or back door

with all the doors closed, all the doors will

be locked provided that the electronic

code in the key corresponds to the regis-

tered ID code for the vehicle.

At this time, you will hear one beep and

the turn signal lights flash once. However,

when you push the lock button on the

outside front door handle or back door

with any door not closed securely, a beep

sounds for 10 seconds.

NOTICE

If the key is in the vehicle, do not

perform door locking operation, or

you might lock your keys inside the

vehicle.

INFORMATION

DThe rear doors are not equipped

with smart function.

DWhen locking the doors, be sure to

push the lock button on the outside

front door handle or back door

slowly and surely. If you push the

button quickly, the doors may not

lock.

DWhen opening or closing a door, do

not touch the lock button on the

outside door handle or back door. If

you push the button, an alarm

sounds 10 seconds.

DWhen a wireless remote control is

used to lock the doors and a smart

key is left in the effective range of

the smart function in the vehicle,

the doors cannot be unlocked using

the smart function. In this case, use

the wireless remote function to un-

lock the doors.

DYou cannot activate smart unlocking

functions within 3 seconds after the

smart locking function is activated.

21p136

UNLOCKING THE DOOR(S) WITH

SMART FUNCTION

The smart entry and start system can

be used to unlock the door(s) without

being inserted into the door keyhole.

When you get close to your vehicle (about

1 m (3 ft.) from each outside front door

handle), and are carrying the smart key,

the electronic code emitted from the key

is automatically checked to determine if it

corresponds to the registered ID code for

the vehicle. When you take hold of the

side back of the outside door handle sur-

face, it will unlock. At this time, two

beeps sound and the turn signal lights

flash twice.

When you push and hold down the back

door opener switch, carrying the smart

key, the ID code is checked in the same

way as in the front door case. And all the

doors will unlock. At this time, two beeps

sound and the turn signal lights flash

twice.

When you get close to your vehicle (about

1 m or 3 ft. from either front door), carry-

ing the smart key or unlock the back door

using smart key function, the interior light

comes on for 15 seconds if the interior

light switch is in the “DOOR” position.

However, the interior lights go out when

you push the power door lock switch in

the lock position or press the “POWER”

switch once or twice from the off setting

to select the “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode

without depressing the brake pedal. For

further information, see “Interior lights” on

page 107.

You have 30 seconds to open a door after

operating the smart unlocking function. If

a door is not opened by then, all the

doors will be automatically locked again.

INFORMATION

DThe rear doors are not equipped

with smart function.

DWhen unlocking the door(s), be sure

to take hold of the back side of the

outside door handle firmly as

shown in the illustration. Taking

hold of the handle with a gloved

hand might cause a delay in unlock-

ing.

DWhen you take hold of the handle

or push the back door opener to

unlock the door(s), be sure to con-

firm that the door(s) have been un-

locked. If the two beeps and the

turn signal lights flash twice, the

doors are unlocked. At this time,

you can pull the outside door han-

dle or push the back door opener to

open the door. If you quickly move

closer to the vehicle or pull the out-

side door handle or push the back

door opener quickly, the doors

might not unlock. If you cannot

open the door by pulling the out-

side door handle or pushing the

back door at this time, push back

the outside door handle to the origi-

nal position or release your hand

from the back door and then try

again.

DIf you bring the smart key very

close to the outside door handle or

the back door opener, the doors

might not lock.

DIf another person who is not carry-

ing a smart key takes hold of an

outside door handle or push the

back door opener when you are

within the effective range of the

smart function, the door(s) may not

unlock.

DIf a large amount of water is ap-

plied to the outside door handle or

the back door during heavy rain or

a car wash, and someone carrying a

smart key is near the vehicle, the

door(s) might be unlocked. However,

if the outside front door handle is

not pulled out or back door opener

not pushed, the doors will lock au-

tomatically after about 30 seconds.

DTo ensure the unlocking door(s),

perform unlocking operation within

3 seconds after getting close to the

vehicle (about 1 m or 3 ft. from the

front doors or back door). If it

takes longer than that, unlocking

function may not be enabled.

CHANGING THE DOORS TO BE UN-

LOCKED

Each time you push the lock button

together with the panic button on the

smart key for about 5 seconds with the

hybrid system off, the setting for door

unlocking will change as follows:

1. Driver’s door unlocking mode: If you

perform smart unlocking operation on

the driver’s door, it will unlock. Per-

forming unlocking operation on the

front passenger’s door or back door

will unlock all the doors. When the

system switches to this mode, one

beep sounds inside the vehicle and two

beeps sound three times.

2. All doors unlocking mode: Performing

smart unlocking operation on either

front door or back door will unlock all

the doors. When the system switches

to this mode, one beep sounds inside

the vehicle and two beeps sound twice.

3. Single door unlocking mode: The

driver’s door or back door on which

you perform smart unlocking operation

will unlock. However, performing un-

locking operation on the front passen-

ger’s door will unlock all the doors.

When the system switches to this

mode, one beep sounds inside the ve-

hicle and two beeps sound once.

INFORMATION

zWhen changing the mode, be sure

to push both lock and panic but-

tons firmly, or panic alarm may be

activated.

zThis operation will not change the

wireless remote control unlocking

function.

zIn the single or driver’s door un-

locking mode, if you get into the

vehicle from the driver’s door carry-

ing the smart key, all the smart un-

locking controls activated by the

smart key will be stopped for secu-

rity. If you get out of the vehicle

from the driver’s door carrying the

smart key and get out of the effec-

tive range of the smart function,

unlocking control by the smart key

will be possible. However, unlocking

control may not be carried out for

5 seconds after you get out from

the vehicle. In this case, operate

unlock control again after 5 sec-

onds.

BATTERY POWER SAVING

When doors are locked, the smart entry

and start system transmits electromagnetic

waves to the outside of the vehicle at

regular intervals. For this reason, the ve-

hicle battery will be discharged if the ve-

hicle is left for a long time. If the key is

left within the effective range of the smart

function outside of the vehicle, the key

and the vehicle transmit electromagnetic

waves periodically. If these conditions con-

tinue for a long time, the battery in the

key and vehicle will be discharged.

To prevent the batteries from being dis-

charged, the smart function is automatical-

ly deactivated in the following conditions:

DIf there is no response from the key

for more than 14 days

DIf the key is left within the effective

range of the smart function outside of

the vehicle for more than 10 minutes

To reactivate the smart function, perform

any of the following:

(a) Press the lock button on the outside

front door handle or back door while

carrying the smart key.

(b) Perform a wireless remote control op-

eration.

the keyhole of the driver’s door.

INFORMATION

DTo maintain communication with the

vehicle, smart keys use built−in bat-

tery power. The battery service life

is about 1 to 3 years on average. If

battery power becomes insufficient,

replace the battery with a new one.

DThe smart key continually receives

electromagnetic waves, and if it re-

ceives strong electromagnetic waves

over a period of time, the battery

can be drastically run down. There-

fore, avoid storing smart keys near

any electrical appliances.

Here is a list of electrical ap-

pliances which may have adverse

effects on the smart key perfor-

mance: TVs, personal computers,

cellular phone or cordless phone

recharger units, electric light stands

and fluorescent desk lights

Note that you should always keep

such electrical appliances at least 1

m (3 ft.) away from the smart key.

21p138a

1. Smart function is on.

2. Smart function is off.

DEACTIVATING THE SMART FUNCTION

The cancel switch for this function is

located at the bottom of the instrument

panel on the driver side. When you

push the switch, the smart function will

be deactivated. Pushing the switch

again will reactivate the function.

When the smart function is deactivated,

use a mechanical key or wireless remote

control function key to lock and unlock the

doors. To start the hybrid system, insert

a smart key into the key slot.

If you do not intend to drive your vehicle

for a long time, push the cancel switch to

deactivate the smart function.

INFORMATION

The smart function will be deactivated

in the following cases:

DThe cancel switch is turned on.

DThe smart key is inserted into the

key slot.

DThe battery of the smart key is dis-

charged.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCC ID: MOZB31EG

MADE IN JAPAN

FCC ID: MOZB31UG

MADE IN JAPAN

FCC ID: MOZRO−2TY−1

MADE IN JAPAN

FCC ID: PENASAT2

MADE IN JAPAN

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS−210 of

industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of

the device.

21p147

1. Lock switch

2. Indicator light

3. Unlock switch

4. Panic switch

The wireless remote control system is

designed to lock or unlock all the side

doors and back door, or activate the

theft deterrent system from a distance

within approximately 1 m (3 ft.) of the

vehicle.

When you operate any switch, push it

slowly and securely. At this time, the indi-

cator light flashes once.

Wireless remote control—

The wireless remote control key is an

electronic component. Observe the follow-

ing instructions in order not to cause dam-

age to the key.

DDo not leave the key in places where

the temperature becomes high such as

on the dashboard.

DDo not disassemble it.

DAvoid knocking it hard against other

objects or dropping it.

DAvoid putting it in water.

If your vehicle is equipped with smart

entry and start system, you can use up

to 5 master keys for the same vehicle. In

case of the vehicle not equipped with

smart entry and start system, up to 4

master keys are available. Contact your

Toyota dealer for detailed information.

If the wireless remote control key does

not actuate the doors or alarm or operate

from a normal distance, or indicator light

on the key is dimmed or does not come

on:

DCheck for closeness to a radio trans-

mitter such as a radio station or an

airport which can interfere with normal

operation of the key.

DThe battery may have been consumed.

Check the battery in the key. To re-

place the battery, see “—Replacing bat-

tery” on page 37.

If you lose your key, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible to avoid the

possibility of theft, or an accident. (See “If

you lose your keys” on page 261.) 21p013f

Locking operation

21p014f

Unlocking operation

—Locking and unlocking

doors

To lock and unlock all the doors, push

the switches slowly and securely.

To lock: Push the lock switch. All the side

doors and back door are locked simulta-

neously. At this time, the turn signal lights

will flash once.

Check to see that the doors are securely

locked.

If any of the doors is not securely closed

or if the key is in the key slot, locking

cannot be performed by the lock switch.

At this time, a beep will sound for 10

seconds on the vehicle with smart entry

and smart system. However, if the key is

in the key slot, a beep will not sound. To

stop the beep, close all the side doors

and back door securely or push the un-

lock switch.

The buzzer can be disabled. For details,

contact your Toyota dealer.

To unlock: Push the unlock switch once to

unlock the driver’s door alone. Pushing

the switch twice within 3 seconds unlocks

all the doors simultaneously. Each time

the unlock switch is pushed, the turn sig-

nal lights will flash twice.

This double switch operation to unlock all

the side doors and back door can be

changed to a single switch operation. For

details, contact your Toyota dealer.

When the unlock switch is pressed the

interior light comes on. The light remains

on for about 15 seconds unless any of the

doors is opened and then closed. (For

further information, see “Interior lights” on

page 107.)

You have 30 seconds to open a door after

using the wireless remote unlock feature.

If a door is not opened by then, all the

doors will be automatically locked again.

The timing for the automatic door lock

function can be changed. For details, con-

tact your Toyota dealer.

If the lock or unlock switch is kept

pressed in, the locking or unlocking opera-

tion is not repeated. Release the switch

and then push it again.

The following adjustments can be made in

this system. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer:

DCancelling the wireless door locking or

unlocking function

DCancelling the flash of the turn signal

lights

21p015a

Pushing the panic switch for 1 second

blows the horn intermittently and

flashes the headlights, tail lights and

emergency flashers and turns on the

interior light.

The panic switch is used to deter vehicle

theft when you witness anyone attempting

to break into or damage your vehicle.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stop

the alarm midway, do the follows:

DPush any switch on the key.

DPut the hybrid system in the “IG−ON”

mode.

—Activating panic mode

The panic mode does not work in “IG−ON”

mode.

The alarm function can be activated or

deactivated. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCC ID: MOZB21TG

MADE IN JAPAN

FCC ID: MOZB21RG

MADE IN JAPAN

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS−210 of

industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of

the device.

For replacement, use a CR2032 lithium

battery or equivalent and a special screw-

driver.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken that

small children do not swallow the re-

moved battery or components.

NOTICE

zWhen replacing the battery, be care-

ful not to lose the components.

zReplace only with the same or

equivalent type recommended by a

Toyota dealer.

zDispose of used batteries according

to the local laws.

Replace the battery by following proce-

dures.

—Replacing battery

21p016d

1. Remove the mechanical key and cover

with slide the lock knob in the arrow

direction.

21p017c

2. Remove the 4 screws to take out the

lid of the module.

NOTICE

Do not bend the terminals.

3. Remove the discharged battery and put

in a new battery with positive (+) side

up.

NOTICE

zMake sure the positive side and

negative side of the battery are

faced correctly.

zDo not replace the battery with wet

hands. Water may cause unexpected

rust.

zDo not touch or move any compo-

nents inside the transmitter, or it

may interfere with proper operation.

zBe careful not to bend the electrode

when inserting the battery and that

dust or oils do not adhere to the

case.

4. Install the lid with the 4 screws.

NOTICE

Take care not to damage or bend the

O−ring when installing.

5. Replace the mechanical key and cover

with slide the lock knob.

After replacing the battery, check that the

key operates properly. If the key still does

not operate properly, contact your Toyota

dealer.

21p008a

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING THE DRIV-

ER’S DOOR WITH MECHANICAL KEY

Insert the mechanical key into the key-

hole and turn it.

To lock: Turn the knob forward.

To unlock: Turn the knob backward.

The alarm sounds when you unlock the

door using a key with the theft deterrent

system set. For details, see “Theft deter-

rent system” on page 45.

21p009a

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH IN-

SIDE LOCK KNOB

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward.

To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

The driver’s door can be opened by pull-

ing the inside door handle even if the lock

knob is depressed.

Closing the door with the lock knob in the

lock position will also lock the door. Be

careful not to lock your keys in the ve-

hicle.

The driver’s door cannot be locked if you

leave the key in the key slot.

21p010a

Driver’s side

21p011a

Front passenger’s side

Side doors

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH

POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch down on the

front side.

To unlock: Push the switch down on the

rear side.

All the doors lock or unlock simultaneous-

ly.

21p012b

REAR DOOR CHILD−PROTECTORS

Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”

position as shown on the label.

When the child−protector is locked, you

cannot open the rear door by the inside

door handle. We recommend using this

feature whenever small children are in the

vehicle.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doors

are closed and locked, especially

when small children are in the ve-

hicle. Along with the proper use of

seat belts, locking the doors helps

prevent the driver and passengers

from being thrown out from the ve-

hicle in an accident. It also helps pre-

vent the doors from being opened

unintentionally.

12p032

To open the back door, push the back

door opener and raise the back door.

If the back door opener does not operate,

see “If you cannot operate back door

opener” on page 262.

12p033

When closing the back door, the inside

handle can be used to make the reach

easier.

See “Cargo and luggage” on page 228 for

precautions to observe when loading lug-

gage.

To close the back door, lower it and press

down on it. After closing the back door,

try pulling it up to make sure it is secure-

ly closed.

CAUTION

Keep the back door closed while driv-

ing. This not only keeps the luggage

from being thrown out, but also pre-

vents exhaust gases from entering

the vehicle.

If the auxiliary battery is disconnected

or run down, the back door will be auto-

matically locked and the back door system

may not work after you reconnect, replace

or recharge the auxiliary battery. In any of

these cases, normalize the back door sys-

tem by following procedure.

1. Unlock the back door with the remote

control key or power door lock switch.

2. Close the back door completely by

hand.

If the back door system does not operate

properly after the above procedure, there

may be a problem in the system. Contact

your Toyota dealer.

Back door

21p019a

The windows can be operated with the

switch on each door.

The power windows work when the “IG−

ON” mode is enabled.

Key off operation: If both front doors are

closed, they work for 45 seconds even

after the hybrid system is stopped. They

stop working when either front door is

opened.

OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW

Use the switch on the driver’s door.

Normal operation: The window moves as

long as you hold the switch.

To open: Lightly push down the switch.

To close: Lightly pull up the switch.

21p020b

Automatic operation: Push the switch

completely down or pull it completely up,

and then release it. The window will fully

open or close. To stop the window part-

way, lightly move the switch in the oppo-

site direction and then release it.

Jam protection function: If something

gets caught between the window and win-

dow frame during automatic closing opera-

tion or key off closing operation, the win-

dow stops and opens halfway.

If the window receives a strong impact,

this function may work even if nothing is

caught.

If the auxiliary battery is disconnected

or run down, the power window may not

operate automatically and the jam protec-

tion function will not function correctly af-

ter you reconnect, replace or recharge the

auxiliary battery. In any of these cases,

you should normalize the power window.

To normalize the power window:

1. Push down the power window switch

and lower the window halfway.

2. Pull up the switch until the window

closes and hold the switch for a sec-

ond.

Make sure that the window opens and

closes automatically. If the power window

cannot be operated properly, have it

checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

DNever try jamming any part of your

body to activate the jam protection

function intentionally.

DThe jam protection function may

not work if something gets caught

just before the window is fully

closed.

Power windows

21p021b

Window lock

switch

OPERATING THE PASSENGERS’

WINDOWS

Use the switch on each passenger’s

door or the switches on the driver’s

door that control each passengers’ win-

dow.

The window moves as long as you hold

the switch.

To open: Push down the switch.

To close: Pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch on

the driver’s door, the passengers’ windows

cannot be operated.

21p022b21p022c

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, you

must do the following.

DBefore you close the power win-

dows, always make sure there is

nobody around the power windows.

You must also make sure the

heads, hands and other parts of the

bodies of all occupants are kept

completely inside the vehicle. If

someone’s neck, head or hands get

caught in a closing window, it

could result in death or serious in-

jury. When anyone closes the power

windows, make sure that he or she

operates the windows safely.

DWhen small children are in the ve-

hicle, never let them use the power

window switches without supervi-

sion. Use the window lock switch to

prevent them from making unex-

pected use of the switches.

DTurn the hybrid system “OFF” and

take the key with you, when you

leave your vehicle.

DNever leave anyone (particularly a

small child) alone in your vehicle,

especially with the key still inserted

or with the hybrid system other

than “OFF”. Otherwise, he/she

could use the power window

switches and get trapped in a win-

dow. Unattended person (particular-

ly a small child) can be involved in

a serious accident.

21p026b

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. The

hood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hood

is closed and securely locked. Other-

wise, the hood may open unexpected-

ly while driving and an accident may

occur.

21p027d

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up the

auxiliary catch lever and lift the

hood.

Hood

21p032e

3. Hold the hood open by inserting the

support rod into the slot.

Before closing the hood, check to see that

you have not forgotten any tools, rags,

etc. and return the support rod to its

clip—this prevents rattles. Then lower the

hood and make sure it locks into place.

If necessary, press down gently on the

front edge to lock it.

CAUTION

After inserting the support rod into

the slot, make sure the rod supports

the hood securely from falling down

on to your head or body.

NOTICE

Be sure to return the support rod to

its clip before closing the hood. Clos-

ing the hood with the support rod

inserted into the slot could cause the

hood to bend.

Theft deterrent system

21p028a

To deter vehicle theft, the system is

designed to sound an alarm if any of

the doors or hood is forcibly unlocked

or the battery terminal is reconnected

when the vehicle is locked.

The alarm blows the horn intermittently

and flashes the headlights and tail lights

and other exterior lights.

This function can be deactivated or acti-

vated. For details, contact your Toyota

dealer.

21p007b

SETTING THE SYSTEM

When the key is inserted into the key

slot:

1. Remove the key.

In case of the smart entry and start

system:

1. Stop the hybrid system and open the

driver’s door

The indicator light will start flashing. (See

“Hybrid vehicle immobilizer system” on

page 21 for details.)

2. Have all passengers get out of the

vehicle.

3. Close and lock all the doors and hood.

The indicator light will come on when all

the doors and hood are closed and

locked.

The system will automatically be set after

30 seconds. When the system is set, the

indicator light will start flashing again.

4. After making sure the indicator light

starts flashing, you may leave the ve-

hicle.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle when

you set the system, because unlocking

from the inside will activate the system.

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET

Activating the system

The system will sound the alarm under

the following conditions:

DIf any of the doors is unlocked or if

the hood is forcibly opened without the

mechanical key, wireless remote control

transmitter or smart function.

DIf the battery terminal is disconnected

and then reconnected.

The indicator light will come on when the

system is activated.

If any of the doors are unlocked without

the mechanical key, wireless remote con-

trol transmitter or smart function and the

key is not in the key slot, all the doors

will be automatically locked again.

After 1 minute, the alarm will automatically

stop and the indicator light will starts

flashing again.

Reactivating the alarm

Once set, the system automatically resets

the alarm after the alarm stops.

The alarm will activate again under the

same circumstances described in

“Activating the system”.

Stopping the alarm

The alarm will be stopped by the following

two ways:

DTurn the hybrid system to “IG−ON”.

DUnlock any of the doors with the me-

chanical key, wireless remote control

transmitter or smart function.

If the auxiliary battery becomes dis-

charged due to the vehicle being unused

for a long time, etc., when the battery is

recharged or replaced, the system will

sound the alarm. If this happens, immedi-

ately stop the alarm.

CANCELLING THE SYSTEM

The system will be cancelled by the

above mentioned two ways.

If the tail lights come on for 2 seconds,

the theft deterrent system has been

alarmed. Check to see if there is any

abnormality on your vehicle.

TESTING THE SYSTEM

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described above.

The doors should be locked with the

mechanical key, wireless remote control

transmitter or smart function. Be sure

to wait until the indicator light goes off

or starts flashing.

3. Unlock any door from the inside. The

system should activate the alarm.

4. Stop the alarm as described above.

5. Repeat this operation for the other

doors and hood. When testing the back

door, also check that the system is

activated when the auxiliary battery ter-

minal is disconnected and then recon-

nected. When testing the hood, release

the lock with the hood lock release

lever and raise the hood.

If the system does not work properly,

have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

21p117

This indicates that the fuel filler door

is on the left side of your vehicle.

21p030d

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the

lever up.

When refueling, turn off the hybrid

system.

Fuel tank cap

CAUTION

DDo not smoke, cause spark or allow

open flames when refueling. The

fumes are flammable.

DWhen opening the cap, do not re-

move the cap quickly. In hot weath-

er, fuel under pressure could cause

injury by spraying out the filler

neck if the cap is suddenly re-

moved.

DInsert the fuel nozzle fully, or fuel

may splash out.

21p114

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn

the cap counterclockwise by 90 de-

grees (to the pressure point 1), and

then turn it a additional 30 degrees

(to point 2). Pause slightly before

removing it.

It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh

when the cap is opened.

21p115

3. The removed cap can be stored on

the back side of the fuel filler door.

Position the cap so that the hooks point

to the left and right, and set it in the

receptacle on the back side of the door.

When installing the cap, turn the cap

clockwise until you hear a click. When

you hear the click, the cap is fully

closed.

If the cap is not tightened securely, the

malfunction indicator lamp comes on.

Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

The indicator lamp goes off after driving

several times. If the indicator lamp does

not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as

soon as possible.

CAUTION

DMake sure the cap is installed se-

curely to prevent fuel spillage in

the event of an accident.

DUse only a genuine Toyota fuel tank

cap for replacement. It is designed

to regulate fuel tank pressure.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the cap, apply

force only in the turning direction to

the cap. Do not pull or pry it.

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Occupant restraint systems

Seats 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front seatss 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fold−down rear seat 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Head restraints 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belts 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SRS driver and front passenger airbags 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Child restraint 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2– 2

While the vehicle is being driven, all ve-

hicle occupants should have the seatback

upright, sit well back in the seat and prop-

erly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

DDo not drive the vehicle unless the

occupants are properly seated. Do

not allow any passengers to sit on

top of a folded−down seatback, or

in the luggage compartment or car-

go area. Persons not properly

seated and/or not properly re-

strained by seat belts can be se-

verely injured in the event of emer-

gency braking or a collision.

DDuring driving, do not allow any

passengers to stand up or move

around between seats. Otherwise,

severe injuries can occur in the

event of emergency braking or a

collision.

Driver seat

CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys with

considerable force, and can cause

death or serious injury especially if

the driver is very close to the airbag.

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration “NHTSA” advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbag

is the first 50−75 mm (2−3 in.) of

inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10

in.) from your diver airbag provides

you with a clear margin of safety.

This distance is measured from the

center of the steering wheel to your

breastbone. If you sit less than 250

mm (10 in.) away now, you can

change your driving position in sever-

al ways:

DMove your seat to the rear as far

as you can while still reaching the

pedals comfortably.

DSlightly recline the back of the

seat. Although vehicle designs vary,

many drivers can achieve the 250

mm (10 in.) distance, even with the

driver seat all the way forward, sim-

ply by reclining the back of the

seat somewhat. If reclining the back

of your seat makes it hard to see

the road, raise yourself by using a

firm, non−slippery cushion, or raise

the seat if your vehicle has that

feature.

DIf your steering wheel is adjustable,

tilt it downward. This points the air-

bag toward your chest instead of

your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as rec-

ommended by NHTSA above, while

still maintaining control of the foot

pedals, steering wheel, and your view

of the instrument panel controls.

Seats Front seats—

—Front seat precautions

Front passenger seat

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag also

deploys with considerable force, and

can cause death or serious injury es-

pecially if the front passenger is very

close to the airbag. The front passen-

ger seat should be as far from the

airbag as possible with the seatback

adjusted, so the front passenger sits

upright.

Front seats (with SRS side airbags)

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed in

the driver and front passenger seats.

Observe the following precautions.

DDo not lean against the front door

when the vehicle is in use, since

the side airbag inflates with consid-

erable speed and force. Otherwise,

you may be killed or seriously in-

jured.

DDo not use seat accessories which

cover the area where the side air-

bags inflate. Such accessories may

prevent the side airbags from acti-

vating correctly, causing death or

serious injury.

DDo not modify or replace the seats

or upholstery of the seats equipped

with side airbags. Such change may

prevent the side airbag system from

activating correctly, disable the sys-

tem or cause the side airbags to

inflate accidentally, resulting in

death or serious injury.

CAUTION

DDo not adjust the seat while the

vehicle is moving as the seat may

unexpectedly move and cause the

driver to lose control of the vehicle.

DBe careful that the seat does not

hit a passenger or luggage.

DAfter adjusting the seat position, re-

lease the lever and try sliding the

seat forward and backward to make

sure it is locked in position.

DAfter adjusting the seatback, push

your body back against the seat to

make sure the seat is locked in

position.

DDo not put objects under the seats.

Otherwise, the objects may interfere

with the seat−lock mechanism or

unexpectedly push up the seat posi-

tion adjusting lever and the seat

may suddenly move, causing the

driver to lose control of the vehicle.

—Seat adjustment precautions

DWhile adjusting the seat, do not put

your hands under the seat or near

the moving parts. Otherwise, your

hands or fingers may be caught

and injured.

22p001d

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Hold the center of the lever and pull it

up. Then slide the seat to the desired

position with slight body pressure and

release the lever.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING

LEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.

Then lean back to the desired angle

and release the lever.

CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts pro-

vide maximum protection in a frontal

or rear collision when the driver and

the front passenger are sitting up

straight and well back in the seats. If

you are reclined, the lap belt may

slide past your hips and apply re-

straint forces directly to the abdomen

or your neck may contact the shoul-

der belt. In the event of a frontal

collision, the more the seat is re-

clined, the greater the risk of death

or personal injury.

—Adjusting front seats

22p226

1. Remove the head restraint. Hold the

center of the lever and pull it up.

Then slide the seat further forward

than the front−most lock position.

22p227

2. Pull the seatback angle adjusting le-

ver to unlock and push down the

seatback.

When returning the seatback upright, be

careful not to make yourself hit by the

seatback which will bound with consid-

erable spring force.

After returning the seat to its original

position, be certain to replace the head

restraint.

CAUTION

DDo not allow passengers to ride on

the flattened seat while driving; use

the seat in the normal position.

DAfter putting back the seat, try

pushing the seat and seatback for-

ward and rearward to make sure it

is secured in place. Be certain to

replace head restraint.

—Flattening seatbacks

Lower the head restraints to the lowest

position. Push down the lock release

button and fold the seatback down.

Each seatback can be folded separately.

This will enlarge the luggage compartment

as far as the seatbacks. See “Cargo and

luggage” on page 228 for precautions

when loading luggage.

CAUTION

When only rear left seat is folded

down, rear seat alone can be used.

Never sit on the center seat because

the rear center seat belt cannot be

fastened correctly when the rear left

seat is folded down. 22p203

BEFORE RETURNING REAR SEAT

Make sure the shoulder belt pass

through the guide when returning the

seatback up.

If the shoulder belt on the rear right seat

is off the guide, the air vent for cooling

the hybrid vehicle battery may be blocked

by the belt. If the hybrid vehicle battery

cannot be cooled, the output performance

is limited, reducing the driving perfor-

mance.

Fold−down rear seat

CAUTION

When returning the seatback to the

upright position, observe the follow-

ing precautions in order to prevent

personal injury in a collision or sud-

den stop:

DMake sure seatback is securely

locked by pushing forward and rear-

ward on the top of the seatback.

Failure to do so will prevent the

seat belt from operating properly.

DMake sure the seat belts are not

twisted or caught in the seatback

and are arranged in the proper

position and are ready to use.

22p002b

Front

22p101b

Rear

For your safety and comfort, adjust the

head restraint before driving,

To raise: Pull it up.

To lower: Push it down while pressing the

lock release button.

Rear center head restraint—When an oc-

cupant sits on the rear center seat, al-

ways pull up the rear center head re-

straint to the lock position.

The head restraint is most effective when

it is close to your head. Therefore, using

a cushion on the seatback is not recom-

mended.

CAUTION

DAdjust the center of the head re-

straint so that it is closest to the

top of your ears.

DAfter adjusting the head restraint,

make sure it is locked in position.

DDo not drive with the head re-

straints removed.

Head restraints

Toyota strongly urges that the driver and

passengers in the vehicle be properly re-

strained at all times with the seat belts

provided. Failure to do so could increase

the chance of injury and/or the severity of

injury in accidents.

The seat belts provided for your vehicle

are designed for people of adult size,

large enough to properly wear them.

Child. Use a child restraint system ap-

propriate for the child until the child be-

comes large enough to properly wear the

vehicle’s seat belts. For details, see “Child

restraint” on page 79.

If a child is too large for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the rear

seat and must be restrained using the

vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident

statistics, the child is safer when properly

restrained in the rear seat than in the

front seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, the

seat belts should be worn properly. If an

accident occurs and the seat belts are not

worn properly, the force of the rapid infla-

tion of the airbag may cause death or

serious injury to the child.

Do not allow any children to stand up or

kneel on either rear or front seats. An

unrestrained child could suffer serious in-

jury or death during emergency braking or

a collision. Also, do not let the child sit

on your lap. Holding a child in your arms

does not provide sufficient restraint.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends the

use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for

specific recommendations. The lap belt

should be worn securely and as low as

possible over the hips and not on the

waist.

Injured person. Toyota recommends the

use of a seat belt. Depending on the inju-

ry, first check with your doctor for specific

recommendations.

CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seats

properly wearing their seat belts

whenever the vehicle is moving.

Otherwise, they are much more likely

to suffer serious bodily injury or

death in the event of sudden braking

or a collision.

When using the seat belts, observe

the following:

DUse the belt for only one person at

a time. Do not use a single belt for

two or more people—even children.

DAvoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts

provide maximum protection in a

frontal or rear collision when the

driver and the front passenger are

sitting up straight and well back in

the seats. If you are reclined, the

lap belt may slide past your hips

and apply restraint forces directly

to the abdomen or your neck may

contact the shoulder belt. In the

event of a frontal collision, the

more the seat is reclined, the great-

er the risk of death or personal in-

jury.

Seat belts—

—Seat belt precautions

DBe careful not to damage the belt

webbing or hardware. Take care that

they do not get caught or pinched

in the seat or doors.

DInspect the belt system periodically.

Check for cuts, fraying, and loose

parts. Damaged parts should be re-

placed. Do not disassemble or

modify the system.

DKeep the belts clean and dry. If

they need cleaning, use a mild soap

solution or lukewarm water. Never

use bleach, dye or abrasive clean-

ers, or allow them to come into

contact with the belt—they may se-

verely weaken the belts. (See

“Cleaning the interior” on page

267.)

DReplace the belt assembly (includ-

ing bolts) if it has been used in a

severe impact. The entire assembly

should be replaced even if damage

is not obvious.

22p007

Tab

Buckle

Adjust the seat as needed and sit up

straight and well back in the seat. To

fasten your belt, pull it out of the re-

tractor and insert the tab into the

buckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locks

into the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjusts

to your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during a

sudden stop or on impact. It also may

lock if you lean forward too quickly. A

slow, easy motion will allow the belt to

extend, and you can move around freely.

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-

pletely extended and is then retracted

even slightly, the belt is locked in that

position and cannot be extended. This fea-

ture is used to hold the child restraint

system securely. (For details, see “Child

restraint” on page 79.) To free the belt

again, fully retract the belt and then pull

the belt out once more.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the

retractor, firmly pull the belt and release

it. You will then be able to smoothly pull

the belt out of the retractor.

CAUTION

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the belt is not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent you

from properly latching the tab and

buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, immediately contact your

Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat

until the seat belt is fixed, because

it cannot protect an adult occupant

or your child from injury.

—Fastening front and rear

seat belts

22p006a

Take up slack

Keep as low on hips

as possible

Too high

Adjust the position of the lap and

shoulder belts.

Position the lap belt as low as possible

on your hips—not on your waist, then ad-

just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder

portion upward through the latch plate.

CAUTION

DBoth high−positioned lap belts and

loose−fitting belts could cause seri-

ous injuries due to sliding under

the lap belt during a collision or

other unintended event. Keep the

lap belt positioned as low on hips

as possible.

DDo not place the shoulder belt un-

der your arm.

22p005b

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulder

anchor—

Adjust the shoulder anchor position to

your size.

To raise: Slide the anchor up.

To lower: Push in the lock release button

and slide the anchor down.

After adjustment, make sure the anchor is

locked in position.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder belt

is positioned across the center of

your shoulder. The belt should be

kept away from your neck, but not

falling off your shoulder. Failure to

do so could reduce the amount of

protection in an accident and cause

serious injuries in a collision.

22p004a

To release the belt, press the buckle

release button and allow the belt to

retract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull

it out and check for kinks or twists. Then

make sure it remains untwisted as it re-

tracts.

—Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened se-

curely because they are not long enough,

a personalized seat belt extender is avail-

able from your Toyota dealer free of

charge.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer so

that the dealer can order the proper re-

quired length for the extender. Bring the

heaviest coat you expect to wear for prop-

er measurement and selection of length.

Additional ordering information is available

at your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender,

observe the following precautions.

Failure to follow these instructions

could reduce the effectiveness of the

seat belt restraint system in case of

an accident, increasing the chance of

personal injury.

DRemember that the extender pro-

vided for you may not be safe when

used on a different vehicle, for

another person, or at a different

seating position than the one origi-

nally intended.

22p205

DIf the seat belt extender has been

connected to the driver’s seat belt

buckle without wearing the seat belt

when using the extender in the

driver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-

bag system will judge that the driv-

er wears the seat belt even if not

wearing it. In this case, the driver’s

airbag may not activate correctly,

causing death or serious injury in

the event of collision. Be sure to

wear the seat belt with the seat belt

extender.

DBe sure to wear the seat belt with-

out the seat belt extender if you

can fasten the seat belt without the

extender.

DDo not use the seat belt extender

when installing a child restraint

system on the front or rear passen-

ger seat. If installing a child re-

straint system with the seat belt

extender connected to the seat belt,

the seat belt will not securely hold

the child restraint system, which

could cause death or serious injury

to the child or other passengers in

the event of collision.

22p008

To connect the extender to the seat

belt, insert the tab into the seat belt

buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on

the buckle release buttons of the ex-

tender and the seat belt are both facing

outward as shown.

You will hear a click when the tab locks

into the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, press on

the buckle release button on the extender,

not on the seat belt. This helps prevent

damage to the vehicle interior and extend-

er itself.

When not in use, remove the extender

and store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt and the seat belt extend-

er are not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent you

from properly latching the tab and

buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, immediately contact your

Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat

until the seat belt is fixed, because

it cannot protect an adult occupant

or your child from injury.

22p009a

There are seat belt pretensioners for

both front seats. They are designed to

be activated in response to a severe

frontal impact.

When the sensor detects a severe frontal

impact, the front seat belts are quickly

drawn back by the retractor so that the

belts snugly restrain the occupants.

The seat belt pretensioners are activated

even with no passenger in the front seat.

The seat belt pretensioner and SRS air-

bags may not operate together in all colli-

sions.

22p011a

The seat belt pretensioner system con-

sists mainly of the following components

and their locations are shown in the il-

lustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies

4. Airbag sensor assembly

The seat belt pretensioners are controlled

by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag

sensor assembly consists of a safing sen-

sor and airbag sensor.

—Seat belt pretensioners

When the seat belt pretensioners are acti-

vated, an operating noise may be heard

and a small amount of non−toxic gas may

be released. This does not indicate that

a fire is occurring. This gas is normally

harmless.

Once the seat belt pretensioners have

been activated, the seat belt retractors

remain locked.

CAUTION

Do not modify, remove, strike or open

the seat belt pretensioner assemblies,

airbag sensor or surrounding area or

wiring. Failure to follow these instruc-

tions may prevent the seat belt pre-

tensioners from activating correctly,

cause sudden operation of the system

or disable the system, which could

result in death or serious injury. Con-

sult your Toyota dealer about any re-

pair and modification.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following

changes without consulting your

Toyota dealer. Such changes can in-

terfere with proper operation of the

seat belt pretensioners in some

cases.

zInstallation of electronic devices

such as a mobile two−way radio,

cassette tape player or compact

disc player

zRepairs on or near the front seat

belt retractor assemblies

zModification of the suspension sys-

tem

zModification of the front end struc-

ture

zAttachment of a grille guard (bull

bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,

winches or any other equipment to

the front end

zRepairs made on or near the front

fenders, front end structure or con-

sole

22p010a

This indicator comes on when the “IG−

ON” mode is enabled. It goes off after

about 6 seconds. This means the seat

belt pretensioners are operating proper-

ly.

The warning light system monitors the air-

bag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-

sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-

sors, curtain shield airbag sensors,

driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat

belt buckle switch, front passenger’s seat

belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner

assemblies, warning light, interconnecting

wiring and power sources. (For details,

see “Service reminder indicators and

warning buzzers” on page 117.)

If any of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction of the airbags

or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

DThe light does not come on when the

“IG−ON” mode is enabled or remains

on for more than 6 seconds.

DThe light comes on while driving.

DIf either front seat belt does not retract

or can not be pulled out due to a

malfunction or activation of the relevant

seat belt pretensioner.

22p012a

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible:

DThe front part of the vehicle (shaded

in the illustration) was involved in an

accident that was not severe enough to

cause the seat belt pretensioners to

operate.

DThe seat belt pretensioner assembly or

surrounding area is scratched, cracked,

or otherwise damaged.

22p013a

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem) front airbags are designed to pro-

vide further protection for the driver

and front passenger in addition to the

primary safety protection provided by

the seat belts.

In response to a severe frontal impact,

the SRS front airbags work together with

the seat belts to help reduce injury by

inflating. The SRS front airbags help re-

duce injuries mainly to the driver’s or front

passenger’s head or chest caused by hit-

ting the vehicle interior.

The front passenger airbag is activated

even with no passenger in the front seat.

Always wear your seat belt properly.

SRS driver and front

passenger airbags

CAUTION

DThe SRS front airbag system is de-

signed only as a supplement to the

primary protection of the driver and

front passenger seat belt systems.

The driver and front passenger can

be killed or seriously injured by the

inflating airbags if they do not wear

the available seat belts properly.

During sudden braking just before

a collision, an unrestrained driver

or front passenger can move for-

ward into direct contact with or

close proximity to the airbag which

may then deploy during the colli-

sion. To ensure maximum protection

in an accident, the driver and all

passengers in the vehicle must

wear their seat belts properly. Wear-

ing a seat belt properly during an

accident reduces the chances of

death or serious injury or being

thrown out of the vehicle. For in-

structions and precautions concern-

ing the seat belt system, see “Seat

belts” on page 58.

DImproperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed

or seriously injured by the deploy-

ing airbags. An infant or child who

is too small to use a seat belt

should be properly secured using a

child restraint system. Toyota

strongly recommends that all in-

fants and children be placed in the

rear seat of the vehicle and proper-

ly restrained. The rear seat is the

safest for infants and children. For

instructions concerning the installa-

tion of a child restraint system, see

“Child restraint” on page 79.

The SRS front airbags are designed to

deploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-

sions where the magnitude and duration

of the forward deceleration of the ve-

hicle exceeds the designed threshold

level.

The SRS front airbags will deploy if the

severity of the impact is above the de-

signed threshold level, comparable to an

approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision

when the vehicle has the impact straight

into a fixed barrier that does not move or

deform.

However, this threshold velocity will be

considerably higher if the vehicle strikes

an object, such as a parked vehicle or

sign pole, which can move or deform on

impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an

underride collision (e.g. a collision in

which the front of the vehicle “underrides”,

or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisions

where the forward deceleration of the ve-

hicle is very close to the designed thresh-

old level, the SRS front airbags and the

seat belt pretensioners may not activate

together.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

22p015c

Collision from

the side Vehicle rollover

Collision from

the rear

The SRS front airbags are generally not

designed to inflate if the vehicle is in-

volved in a side or rear collision, if it

rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−

speed frontal collision. But, whenever a

collision of any type causes sufficient

forward deceleration of the vehicle, de-

ployment of the SRS front airbags may

occur.

22p016c

Hitting a curb, edge

of pavement or

hard surface

Falling into or jump-

ing over a deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deploy

if a serious impact occurs to the under-

side of your vehicle. Some examples

are shown in the illustration.

22p206

The SRS front airbag system consists

mainly of the following components and

their locations are shown in the illustra-

tion.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. Airbag module for front passenger (air-

bag and inflator)

4. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

5. Driver’s seat position sensor

6. Airbag sensor assembly

7. Airbag module for driver (airbag and

inflator)

The airbag sensor assembly consists of a

safing sensor and airbag sensor.

The front airbag sensors constantly moni-

tor the forward deceleration of the vehicle.

If an impact results in a forward decelera-

tion beyond the designed threshold level,

the system triggers the airbag inflators. At

this time a chemical reaction in the inflat-

ors very quickly fills the airbags with non−

toxic gas to help restrain the froward mo-

tion of the occupants. The front airbags

then quickly deflate, so that there is no

obstruction of the driver’s vision should it

be necessary to continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce a

loud noise and release some smoke and

residue along with non−toxic gas. This

does not indicate a fire. This smoke may

remain inside the vehicle for some time,

and may cause some minor irritation to

the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to

wash off any residue as soon as possible

to prevent any potential skin irritation with

soap and water. If you can safely exit

from the vehicle, you should do so imme-

diately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in a

fraction of a second, so the airbags must

inflate with considerable force. While the

system is designed to reduce serious inju-

ries, primarily to the head and chest, it

may also cause other, less severe injuries

to the face, chest, arms and hands. These

are usually in the nature of minor burns

or abrasions and swelling, but the force of

a deploying airbag can cause more seri-

ous injuries, especially if an occupant’s

hands, arms, chest or head is in close

proximity to the airbag module at the time

of deployment. This is why it is important

for the occupant to: avoid placing any

object or part of the body between the

occupant and the airbag module; sit

straight and well back into the seat; wear

the available seat belt properly; and sit as

far as possible from the airbag module,

while still maintaining control of the ve-

hicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel

hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot

for several minutes after deployment, so

do not touch! The airbags inflate only

once. The windshield may be damaged by

absorbing some of the force of the inflat-

ing airbag.

CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who is

too close to the steering wheel or

dashboard during airbag deployment

can be killed or seriously injured.

Toyota strongly recommends that:

DThe driver sit as far back as pos-

sible from the steering wheel while

still maintaining control of the ve-

hicle.

DThe front passenger sit as far back

as possible from the dashboard.

DAll vehicle occupants be properly

restrained using the available seat

belts.

DIf the seat belt extender has been

connected to the driver’s seat belt

buckle without wearing the seat belt

when using the extender in the

driver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-

bag system will judge that the driv-

er wears the seat belt even if not

wearing it. In this case, the driver’s

airbag may not activate correctly,

causing death or serious injury in

the event of collision. Be sure to

wear the seat belt with the seat belt

extender.

For instructions and precautions con-

cerning the seating position, see

“—Front seat precautions” on page

52.

22p020a

DDo not sit on the edge of the seat

or lean against the dashboard when

the vehicle is in use, since the

front passenger airbag could inflate

with considerable speed and force.

Anyone who is up against, or very

close to, an airbag when it inflates,

can be killed or seriously injured.

Sit up straight and well back in the

seat, and always use your seat belt

properly.

22p021b

DToyota strongly recommends that

all infants and children be placed in

the rear seat of the vehicle and be

properly restrained.

DDo not allow a child to stand up or

kneel on the front passenger seat,

since the front passenger airbag

could inflate with considerable speed

and force. Otherwise, the child may

be killed or seriously injured.

DDo not hold a child on your lap or

in your arms. Use a child restraint

system in the rear seat. For instruc-

tions concerning the installation of

a child restraint system, see “Child

restraint” on page 79.

22p022c

DDo not put anything or any part of

your body on or in front of the

dashboard or steering wheel pad

that houses the front airbag sys-

tem. They might restrict inflation or

cause death or serious injury as

they are projected rearward by the

force of the deploying airbags. Like-

wise, the driver and front passenger

should not hold objects in their

arms or on their knees.

DDo not modify or remove any wir-

ing. Do not modify, remove, strike

or open any components, such as

the steering wheel pad, steering

wheel, column cover, dashboard

near the front passenger airbag,

front passenger airbag cover, front

passenger airbag or airbag sensor

assembly. Doing so may prevent the

front airbag system from activating

correctly, cause sudden front air-

bags activation of the system or

disable the system, which could re-

sult in death or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructions

can result in death or serious injury.

Consult your Toyota dealer about any

repair and modification.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following

changes without consulting your

Toyota dealer. Such changes can in-

terfere with proper operation of the

SRS front airbag system in some

cases.

zInstallation of electronic devices

such as a mobile two−way radio,

cassette tape player or compact

disc player

zModification of the suspension sys-

tem

zModification of the front end struc-

ture

zAttachment of a grille guard (bull

bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,

winches or any other equipment to

the front end

zRepairs made on or near the front

fenders, front end structure, con-

sole, steering column, steering

wheel or dashboard near the front

passenger airbag

22p010a

This indicator comes on when the “IG−

ON” mode is enabled. It goes off after

about 6 seconds. This means the SRS

front airbags are operating properly.

The warning light system monitors the air-

bag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-

sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-

sors, curtain shield airbag sensors,

driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat

belt buckle switch, front passenger’s seat

belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner

assemblies, warning light, interconnecting

wiring and power sources. (For details,

see “Service reminder indicators and

warning buzzers” on page 117.)

If any of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction of the airbags

or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

DThe light does not come on when the

“IG−ON” mode is enabled or remains

on for more than 6 seconds.

DThe light comes on while driving.

22p023b

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible:

DThe SRS front airbags have been in-

flated.

DThe front of the vehicle (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident

that was not severe enough to cause

the SRS front airbags to inflate.

DThe pad section of the steering wheel

or front passenger airbag cover

(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,

cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cables

before contacting your Toyota dealer.

22p024b

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem) side airbags and curtain shield air-

bags are designed to provide further

protection for the driver, front passen-

ger and rear outside passengers in

addition to the primary safety protec-

tion provided by the seat belts.

In response to a severe side impact, the

SRS side airbags and curtain shield air-

bags work with the seat belts to help

reduce injury by inflating. The SRS side

airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the

driver’s or front passenger’s chest and the

SRS curtain shield airbags help reduce

injuries mainly to the driver’s, front pas-

senger’s or rear outside passenger’s head.

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag on the passenger side are activated

even with no passenger in the front seat

or rear seat.

The SRS curtain shield airbags may acti-

vate even when the side airbags are not

activated.

Always wear your seat belt properly.

SRS side airbags and curtain

shield airbags

CAUTION

DThe SRS side airbag and curtain

shield airbag system is designed

only as a supplement to the prima-

ry protection of the driver, front

passenger and rear outside passen-

ger seat belt systems. To ensure

maximum protection in an accident,

the driver and all passengers in the

vehicle must wear their seat belts

properly. Wearing a seat belt prop-

erly during an accident reduces the

chances of death or serious injury

or being thrown out of the vehicle.

For instructions and precautions

concerning the seat belt system,

see “Seat belts” on page 58.

DDo not allow anyone to lean his/her

head or any part of his/her body

against the door or the area of the

seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof

side rail from which the SRS side

airbag and curtain shield airbag

deploy even if he/she is a child

seated in the child restraint system.

It is dangerous if the SRS side air-

bag and curtain shield airbag in-

flate, and the impact of the deploy-

ing airbag could cause death or se-

rious injury to the occupant.

DImproperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed

or seriously injured by the deploy-

ing airbags. An infant or child who

is too small to use a seat belt

should be properly secured using a

child restraint system. Toyota

strongly recommends that all in-

fants and children be placed in the

rear seats of the vehicle and prop-

erly restrained. The rear seats are

the safest for infants and children.

For instructions concerning the

installation of a child restraint sys-

tem, see “Child restraint” on page

79.

22p025a

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag system may not activate if the

vehicle is subjected to a collision from

the side at certain angles, or a collision

to the side of the vehicle body other

than the passenger compartment as

shown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbags and curtain shield

airbags are designed to inflate when the

passenger compartment area suffers a se-

vere impact from the side.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

22p026c

Collision from the rear

Collision from the front

Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbags and curtain shield

airbags are not generally designed to

inflate if the vehicle is involved in a

front or rear collision, if it rolls over,

or if it is involved in a low−speed side

collision.

22p027a

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag system consists mainly of the fol-

lowing components, and their locations are

shown in the illustration.

1. SRS warning light

2. Curtain shield airbag modules

(airbag and inflator)

3. Side airbag modules

(airbag and inflator)

4. Curtain shield airbag sensors

5. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors

6. Airbag sensor assembly

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag system is controlled by the airbag

sensor assembly. The airbag sensor as-

sembly consists of a safing sensor and

airbag sensor.

In a severe side impact, the side and

curtain shield airbag sensor and/or the

curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the

side airbag inflators and/or the curtain

shield airbag inflators. At this time a

chemical reaction in the inflators quickly

fills the airbags with non−toxic gas to help

restrain the lateral motion of the occu-

pants.

When the airbags inflate, they produce a

fairly loud noise and release some smoke

and residue along with non−toxic gas. This

does not indicate a fire. This smoke may

remain inside the vehicle for some time,

and may cause some minor irritation to

the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to

wash off any residue as soon as possible

to prevent any potential skin irritation with

soap and water. If you can safely exit

from the vehicle, you should do so imme-

diately.

Deployment of the airbags happen in a

fraction of a second, so the airbags must

inflate with considerable force. While the

system is designed to reduce serious inju-

ries, it may also cause minor burns or

abrasions and swelling.

Front seats as well as parts of the front

and rear pillars, and roof side rail may be

hot for several minutes, but the airbags

themselves will not be hot. The airbags

are designed to inflate only once.

CAUTION

SRS side airbags and curtain shield

airbags inflate with considerable

force. To reduce the possibility of

death or serious injury when they in-

flate, the driver, front passenger and

rear outside passengers must:

DWear their seat belts properly.

DRemain properly seated with their

backs upright and against the seats

at all times.

22p028c

DDo not allow anyone to lean against

the door when the vehicle is in use,

since the side airbag and curtain

shield airbag could inflate with con-

siderable speed and force. Other-

wise, he/she may be killed or seri-

ously injured. Special care should

be taken especially when you have

a small child in the vehicle.

DSit up straight and well back in the

seat, distributing your weight even-

ly in the seat. Do not apply exces-

sive weight to the outer side of the

seats with a side airbag, and to the

front pillar, rear pillar and roof side

rail with a curtain shield airbag.

22p207

DDo not allow anyone to get his/her

head closer to the area where the

side airbag and curtain shield air-

bag inflate, since these airbags

could inflate with considerable

speed and force. Otherwise, he/she

may be killed or seriously injured.

Special care should be taken espe-

cially when you have a small child

in the vehicle.

DDo not allow anyone to kneel on

the passenger seat, facing the pas-

senger’s side door, since the side

airbag and curtain shield airbag

could inflate with considerable

speed and force. Otherwise, he/she

may be killed or seriously injured.

Special care should be taken espe-

cially when you have a small child

in the vehicle.

22p210

DDo not allow anyone to get his/her

head or hands out of windows

since the curtain shield airbags

could inflate with considerable

speed and force. Otherwise, he/she

may be killed or seriously injured.

Special care should be taken espe-

cially when you have a small child

in the vehicle.

22p029d

DDo not attach a cup holder or any

other device or object on or around

the door. When the side airbag in-

flates, the cup holder or any other

device or object will be thrown with

great force or the side airbag may

not activate correctly, resulting in

death or serious injury. Likewise,

the driver and front passenger

should not hold objects in their

arms or on their knees.

22p221

DDo not attach a microphone or any

other device or object around the

area where the curtain shield airbag

activates such as on the windshield

glass, side door glass, front and

rear pillars, roof side rail and assist

grips. When the curtain shield air-

bag inflates, the microphone or oth-

er device or object will be thrown

away with great force or the curtain

shield airbag may not activate cor-

rectly, resulting in death or serious

injury.

DDo not hook a hanger, heavy or

sharp pointed objects on the coat

hook. If the curtain shield airbag

inflates, those items will be thrown

away with great force or the curtain

shield airbag may not activate cor-

rectly, resulting in death or serious

injury. When you hang clothes,

hang them on the coat hook direct-

ly.

DDo not use seat accessories which

cover the parts where the side air-

bags inflate. Such accessories may

prevent the side airbags from acti-

vating correctly, causing death or

serious injury.

DDo not modify or replace the seats

or upholstery of the seats with side

airbags. Such changes may prevent

the side airbag system from activat-

ing correctly, disable the system or

cause the side airbags to inflate ac-

cidentally, resulting in death or seri-

ous injury.

DDo not disassemble or repair the

front and rear pillars and roof side

rails containing the curtain shield

airbags. Such changes may disable

the system or cause the curtain

shield airbags to inflate accidental-

ly, resulting in death or serious in-

jury.

Failure to follow these instructions

can result in death or serious injury.

Consult your Toyota dealer about any

repair and modification.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following

changes without consulting your

Toyota dealer. Such changes can

interfere with proper operation of the

SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag system in some cases.

zInstallation of electronic devices

such as a mobile two−way radio,

cassette tape player or compact

disc player

zModification of the suspension sys-

tem

zModification of the side structure of

the passenger compartment

zRepairs made on or near the con-

sole or front seat

22p010a

This indicator comes on when the “IG−

ON” mode is enabled. It goes off after

about 6 seconds. This means the SRS

side airbags and curtain shield airbags

are operating properly.

The warning light system monitors the air-

bag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-

sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-

sors, curtain shield airbag sensors,

driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat

belt buckle switch, front passenger’s seat

belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner

assemblies, warning light, interconnecting

wiring and power sources. (For details,

see “Service reminder indicators and

warning buzzers” on page 117.)

If any of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction of the airbags

or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

DThe light does not come on when the

“IG−ON” mode is enabled or remains

on for more than 6 seconds.

DThe light comes on while driving.

22p030f

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible:

DAny of the SRS side airbags and cur-

tain shield airbags have been inflated.

DThe portion of the doors (shaded in the

illustration) were involved in an acci-

dent that was not severe enough to

cause the SRS side airbags and cur-

tain shield airbags to inflate.

DThe surface of the seats with the side

airbag (shaded in the illustration) is

scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-

aged.

DThe portion of the front pillars, rear

pillars or roof side rail garnishes (pad-

ding) containing the curtain shield air-

bags inside (shaded in the illustration)

is scratched, cracked, or otherwise

damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cables

before contacting your Toyota dealer.

Toyota strongly urges the use of ap-

propriate child restraint systems for

children.

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.

and Canada now require the use of a

child restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the rear

seat and must be restrained using the

vehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” on

page 58 for details.

CAUTION

DFor effective protection in automo-

bile accidents and sudden stops, a

child must be properly restrained,

using a seat belt or child restraint

system depending on the age and

size of the child. Holding a child in

your arms is not a substitute for a

child restraint system. In an acci-

dent, the child can be crushed

against the windshield, or between

you and the vehicle’s interior.

Child restraint—

—Child restraint precautions

DToyota strongly urges use of a

proper child restraint system which

conforms to the size of the child,

installed on the rear seat. Accord-

ing to accident statistics, the child

is safer when properly restrained in

the rear seat than in the front seat.

DNever install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passen-

ger seat. In the event of an acci-

dent, the force of the rapid inflation

of the front passenger airbag can

cause death or serious injury to the

child if the rear−facing child re-

straint system is installed on the

front passenger seat.

DA forward−facing child restraint

system should be allowed to be

installed on the front passenger

seat only when it is unavoidable.

Always move the seat as far back

as possible, because the front pas-

senger airbag could inflate with

considerable speed and force.

Otherwise, the child may be killed

or seriously injured.

DOn vehicles with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow

the child to lean his/her head or

any part of his/her body against the

door or the area of the seat, front

or rear pillar or roof side rail from

which the side airbags or curtain

shield airbags deploy even if the

child is seated in the child restraint

system. It is dangerous if the side

airbag and curtain shield airbag in-

flate, and the impact could cause

death or serious injury to the child.

DDo not use the seat belt extender

when installing a child restraint

system on the front or rear passen-

ger seat. If installing a child re-

straint system with the seat belt

extender connected to the seat belt,

the seat belt will not securely hold

the child restraint system, which

could cause death or serious injury

to the child or other passengers in

the event of collision.

DMake sure you have complied with

all installation instructions provided

by the child restraint manufacturer

and that the system is properly se-

cured. If it is not secured properly,

it may cause death or serious inju-

ry to the child in the event of a

sudden stop or accident.

A child restraint system for a small

child or baby must itself be properly

restrained on the seat with the lap por-

tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must

carefully consult the manufacturer’s in-

structions which accompany child re-

straint system.

To provide proper restraint, use a child

restraint system following the manufactur-

er’s instructions about the appropriate age

and size of the child for the child restraint

system.

Install the child restraint system correctly

following the instructions provided by its

manufacturer. General directions are also

provided under the following instructions.

The child restraint system should be

installed on the rear seat. According to

accident statistics, the child is safer when

properly restrained in the rear seat than

in the front seat.

When not using the child restraint system,

keep it secured with the seat belt or place

it somewhere other than the passenger

compartment. This will prevent it from in-

juring passengers in the event of a sud-

den stop or accident.

Child restraint systems are classified into

the following 3 types depending on the

child’s age and size.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

Install the child restraint system following

the instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-

curing the top strap of a child restraint

system.

For instructions about how to use the an-

chor bracket, see “—Using top strap” on

page 91.

The child restraint lower anchorages ap-

proved for your vehicle may also be used.

See “—Installation with child restraint low-

er anchorages” on page 93.

22p031b

(A) Infant seat

22p032b

(B) Convertible seat

—Child restraint system —Types of child restraint

system

22p033b

22p034b

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat must be used in rear−

facing position only.

22p018b

CAUTION

DNever install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passen-

ger seat. In the event of an acci-

dent, the force of the rapid inflation

of the front passenger airbag can

cause death or serious injury to the

child if the rear−facing child re-

straint system is installed on the

front passenger seat.

—Installation with 3−point

type seat belt

22p045d

DDo not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat if it interferes

with the lock mechanism of the

front seats. Otherwise, the child or

front seat occupant(s) may be killed

or seriously injured in case of sud-

den braking or a collision.

DIf the driver’s seat position does

not allow sufficient space for safe

installation, install the child re-

straint system on the rear right

seat.

22p037b

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the infant seat following the

instructions provided by its manufactur-

er and insert the tab into the buckle

taking care not to twist the belt. Keep

the lap portion of the belt tight.

CAUTION

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent your

child from properly latching the tab

and buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from death or serious injury.

Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-

ately. Do not install the child re-

straint system on the seat until the

seat belt is fixed.

22p038b

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it

in the lock mode. When the belt is

then retracted even slightly, it cannot

be extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, make

sure the belt is in the lock mode before

letting the belt retract.

22p039b

3. While pressing the infant seat firmly

against the seat cushion and seatback,

let the shoulder belt retract as far as

it will go to hold the infant seat secure-

ly.

22p040b

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-

tem in different directions to be sure

it is secure. Follow all the installation

instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

22p041c

4. To remove the infant seat, press the

buckle release button and allow the

belt to retract completely. The belt will

move freely again and be ready to

work for an adult or older child passen-

ger.

22p042b

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat must be used in for-

ward−facing or rear−facing position de-

pending on the age and size of the

child. When installing, follow the

manufacturer’s instruction about the ap-

plicable age and size of the child as

well as directions for installing the

child restraint system.

22p043b

CAUTION

DNever install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passen-

ger seat. In the event of and acci-

dent, the force of the rapid inflation

of the front passenger airbag can

cause death or serious injury to the

child if the rear−facing child re-

straint system is installed on the

front passenger seat.

22p044a

Move seat

fully back

DA forward−facing child restraint sys-

tem should be allowed to be

installed on the front passenger

seat only when it is unavoidable.

Always move the seat as far back

as possible, because the front pas-

senger airbag could inflate with

considerable speed and force.

Otherwise, the child may be killed

or seriously injured.

DOn vehicles with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow

the child to lean his/her head or

any part of his/her body against the

door or the area of the seat, front

or rear pillar or roof side rail from

which the side airbags or curtain

shield airbags deploy even if the

child is seated in the child restraint

system. It is dangerous if the side

airbag and curtain shield airbag in-

flate, and the impact could cause

death or serious injury to the child.

22p036e

DDo not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat if it interferes

with the lock mechanism of the

front seats. Otherwise, the child or

front seat occupant(s) may be killed

or seriously injured in case of sud-

den braking or a collision.

DIf the driver’s seat position does

not allow sufficient space for safe

installation, install the child re-

straint system on the rear right

seat.

22p046b

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the convertible seat following

the instructions provided by its

manufacturer and insert the tab into

the buckle taking care not to twist the

belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt

tight.

CAUTION

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent your

child from properly latching the tab

and buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from death or serious injury.

Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-

ately. Do not install the child re-

straint system on the seat until the

seat belt is fixed.

22p047b

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it

in the lock mode. When the belt is

then retracted even slightly, it cannot

be extended.

To hold the convertible seat securely,

make sure the belt is in the lock mode

before letting the belt retract.

22p048b

3. While pressing the convertible seat

firmly against the seat cushion and

seatback, let the shoulder belt retract

as far as it will go to hold the convert-

ible seat securely.

22p049b

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-

tem in different directions to be sure

it is secure. Follow all the installation

instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

22p050b

4. To remove the convertible seat, press

the buckle release button and allow the

belt to retract completely. The belt will

move freely again and be ready to

work for an adult or older child passen-

ger.

22p051b

A booster seat must be used in for-

ward−facing position only.

22p052a

Move seat

fully back

CAUTION

DA forward−facing child restraint

system should be allowed to be

installed on the front passenger

seat only when it is unavoidable.

Always move the seat as far back

as possible, because the front pas-

senger airbag could inflate with

considerable speed and force.

Otherwise, the child may be killed

or seriously injured.

DOn vehicles with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow

the child to lean his/her head or

any part of his/her body against the

door or the area of the seat, front

or rear pillar or roof side rail from

which the side airbags or curtain

shield airbags deploy even if the

child is seated in the child restraint

system. It is dangerous if the side

airbag and curtain shield airbag in-

flate, and the impact could cause

death or serious injury to the child.

22p053b

1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run

the lap and shoulder belt through or

around the booster seat and across the

child following the instructions provided

by its manufacturer and insert the tab

into the buckle taking care not to twist

the belt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly

across the child’s shoulder and that the

lap belt is positioned as low as possible

on the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on

page 58 for details.

CAUTION

DAlways make sure the shoulder belt

is positioned across the center of

child’s shoulder. The belt should be

kept away from child’s neck, but

not falling off child’s shoulder.

Otherwise, the child may be killed

or seriously injured in case of sud-

den braking or a collision.

DBoth high−positioned lap belts and

loose−fitting belts could cause

death or serious injuries due to

sliding under the lap belt during a

collision or other unintended event.

Keep the lap belt positioned as low

on a child’s hips as possible.

DFor child’s safety, do not place the

shoulder belt under child’s arm.

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent your

child from properly latching the tab

and buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from death or serious injury.

Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-

ately. Do not install the child re-

straint system on the seat until the

seat belt is fixed.

22p050b

2. To remove the booster seat, press the

buckle release button and allow the

belt to retract.

—Using a top strap

22p055a

Follow the procedure below for a child

restraint system that requires the use

of a top strap.

22p056e

Anchor brackets

Symbol

Use the anchor brackets on the back of

the rear seatback to attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for each

rear seating position.

This symbol indicates the location of the

anchor brackets.

22p063b

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Remove the luggage cover (see

“Luggage cover” on page 200.) and

raise the head restraint to the upper-

most lock position.

22p215

2. Open the cover of the anchor brack-

et.

22p064d

3. Fix the child restraint system with

the seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchor

bracket and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child re-

straint system, see “Child restraint” on

page 79.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securely

latched, and check that the child re-

straint system is secure by pushing

and pulling it in different directions.

Follow all the installation instructions

provided by its manufacturer. 22p076e

The lower anchorages for the child re-

straint system interfaced with the

FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2 specification

are installed in the rear seat.

The anchorages are installed in the clear-

ance between the seat cushion and seat-

back of both outside rear seats.

Child restraint system interfaced with the

FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification

can be fixed with these anchorages. In

this case, it is not necessary to fix the

child restraint system with a seat belt on

the vehicle.

22p077g

Canada only

Type A

—Installation with child

restraint lower anchorages

22p078g

Canada only

Type B

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM INSTALLA-

TION

1. Widen the gap between the seat

cushion and seatback slightly and

confirm the position of the lower an-

chorages below the symbol in the

seatback.

2. Type A—Latch the hooks of lower

straps onto the anchorages and

tighten the lower straps.

Type B—Latch the buckles onto the

anchorages.

For owners in Canada

The symbol on a child restraint system

indicates the presence of a lower connec-

tor system.

If your child restraint system has a top

strap, it should be anchored. (For the

installation of the top strap, see “—Using

a top strap” on page 91.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc-

tion manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

DWhen using the lower anchorages

for the child restraint system, be

sure that there are no irregular ob-

jects around the anchorages or that

the seat belt is not caught.

DPush and pull the child restraint

system in different directions to be

sure it is secure. Follow all the

installation instructions provided by

its manufacturer.

DDo not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat if it interferes

with the lock mechanism of the

front seats. Otherwise, the child or

front seat occupant(s) may be killed

or seriously injured in case of sud-

den braking or a collision.

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Steering wheel and Mirrors

Tilt steering wheel 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Outside rear view mirrorss 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Anti−glare inside rear view mirror 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auto anti−glare inside rear view mirror 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vanity mirrors 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2– 3

22p058e

To change the steering wheel angle,

hold the steering wheel, push down the

lock release lever, tilt the steering

wheel to the desired angle and push

the lever up to lock the steering wheel

in position.

CAUTION

DDo not adjust the steering wheel

while the vehicle is moving. Doing

so may cause the driver to mishan-

dle the vehicle and an accident may

occur resulting in death or serious

injuries.

DAfter adjusting the steering wheel,

try moving it up and down to make

sure it is locked in position.

22p059a

Adjust the mirror so that you can just

see the side of your vehicle in the mir-

ror.

Be careful when judging the size or dis-

tance of any object seen in the outside

rear view mirror on the passenger’s side

because it is a convex mirror. Any object

seen in a convex mirror will look smaller

and farther away than when seen in a flat

mirror.

When you touch the rear window defogger

switch, the heater panels in the outside

rear view mirrors will quickly clear the

mirror surface. (See “Rear window and

outside rear view mirror defoggers” on

page 110.)

Tilt steering wheel Outside rear view mirrors—

CAUTION

DDo not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. Doing so may

cause the driver to mishandle the

vehicle and an accident may occur

resulting in death or serious inju-

ries.

DSince the mirror surfaces can get

hot, keep your hands off them when

the defogger switch is on.

22p138a

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switch—To select the mirror to

be adjusted

Push the switch to “L” (left) or “R”

(right).

2. Control switch—To move the mirror

Push the switch in the desired direc-

tion.

The mirrors can be adjusted when the

hybrid system is in “ACC” or “IG−ON”.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do not

operate the control or scrape the mir-

ror face. Use a spray de−icer to free

the mirror.

—Power rear view mirror

control

—Folding rear view mirrors

22p066a

The rear view mirrors can be folded

backward for parking in compact areas.

To fold the rear view mirror, push back-

ward.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the mirrors folded

backward. Both the driver and pas-

senger side rear view mirrors must

be extended and properly adjusted

before driving.

22p061

Adjust the mirror so that you can just

see the rear of your vehicle in the mir-

ror.

To reduce glare from headlights of the

vehicle behind you during night driving,

operate the lever on the lower edge of

the mirror.

Daylight driving—Lever at position 1

The reflection in the mirror has greater

clarity at this position.

Night driving—Lever at position 2

Remember that by reducing glare you also

lose some rear view clarity.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. Doing so may

cause the driver to mishandle the ve-

hicle and an accident may occur re-

sulting in death or serious injuries.

Anti−glare inside rear view

mirror

22p213

Adjust the mirror so that you can just

see the rear of your vehicle in the mir-

ror.

This mirror is equipped with auto anti−

glare function. The function is designed

to reduce glare from the headlights of

the vehicle behind you during night

driving.

When the hybrid system is in the “IG−ON”

mode, the inside rear view mirror always

turns on in the automatic function mode.

The green indicator illuminates to show

you that the function is on.

In automatic function mode, if the mirror

detects light from the headlights of the

vehicle behind you, the mirror surface

darkens slightly to reduce the reflected

light.

To turn off the automatic function, push

the “f” switch.

To turn on the automatic function again,

push the “ | ” switch.

Adjust it before driving so that the rear

view is in the best condition.

When the inside air temperature is low, it

may take a little longer for the mirror to

darken in response to the detection of

headlights.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. Doing so may

cause the driver to mishandle the ve-

hicle and an accident may occur re-

sulting in death or serious injuries.

22p214

To ensure correct functioning of an

anti−glare mirror sensor located on the

back side of the mirror, do not touch

or cover the sensor with your finger or

a piece of cloth, etc.

Auto anti−glare inside rear

view mirror

100

22p098b

To use the vanity mirror, swing down

the sun visor and slide the cover.

22p223

To turn on the vanity light, slide the

switch.

The vanity light switch has the following

positions:

“ON”—Turns the light on when you swing

down the sun visor. However, if the visor

has been slid out, the light may not come

on.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

Vanity mirrors

101

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Lights, Wipers and Defogger

Headlights and turn signals 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Emergency flasherss 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument panel light control 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front fog lights 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interior lights 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Personal lights 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Luggage compartment light 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Key slot light 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windshield wipers and washer 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear window wiper and washer 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers 110. . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2– 4

102

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twist

the headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,

side marker and instrument panel lights

Position 2—Headlights and all of the

above

Position 3 (“AUTO”)—Headlights and/or all

of the lights in position 1

They automatically turn on or off depend-

ing on the darkness of the surroundings.*

Manually twist the knob to the position 2

to turn on the headlights if they are need-

ed immediately when entering a dark tun-

nel, parking structure, etc.

NOTE: *The operating condition or sensi-

tivity can be changed. Ask your Toyota

dealer for details.

23p124_1

The automatic light control sensor is on

the top of the driver’s side instrument

panel.

Do not place anything on the instrument

panel, and/or do not affix anything on the

windshield to block this sensor.

Automatic light cut off system

The lights automatically turn off when the

driver’s door is opened with the hybrid

system off. To turn them on again, press

the “POWER” switch twice from the off

setting to select the “IG−ON” mode with-

out depressing the brake pedal or actuate

the headlight switch. If you are going to

park for over one week, make sure the

headlight switch is off.

Headlights and turn signals

(with automatic light control system)

103

When the headlight switch is turned to the

first or second clickstop, the brightness of

the instrument cluster will be reduced

slightly unless the instrument panel light

control dial is turned fully on.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not leave the switch on

longer than necessary when the hy-

brid system is not running.

Daytime running light system*

The headlights turn on at reduced intensi-

ty when the parking brake is released with

the hybrid system started, even with the

light switch in the “OFF” position.

To turn on the other exterior lights and

instrument panel lights, twist the knob to

the position 1.

To turn off the daytime running light sys-

tem, twist the knob to the position 2 or

position 3 with the headlights on or turn

the ignition switch off.

*: Equipped on vehicles sold in Canada

23p109

High−Low beams—For high beams, turn

the headlights on and push the lever away

from you (position 1). Pull the lever to-

ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light

(blue light) on the instrument panel will

tell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights

(position 3)—Pull the lever all the way

back. The high beam headlights turn off

when you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights

even with the knob turned to “OFF”.

23p110

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/

turn signal lever up or down to position

The hybrid system must be in the “IG−

ON” mode.

The lever automatically returns after you

make a turn, but you may have to return

it by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the lever

up or down to the pressure point (position

2) and hold it.

104

If the turn signal indicator lights (green

lights) on the instrument panel flash faster

than normal, a front or rear turn signal

bulb is burned out. See “Replacing light

bulbs—” on page 304.

23p001c

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twist

the headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,

side marker and instrument panel lights

Position 2—Headlights and all of the

above

Automatic light cut off system

The lights automatically turn off when the

driver’s door is opened with the hybrid

system off. To turn them on again, press

the “POWER” switch twice from the off

setting to select the “IG−ON” mode with-

out depressing the brake pedal or actuate

the headlight switch. If you are going to

park for over one week, make sure the

headlight switch is off.

When the headlight switch is turned to the

first or second clickstop, the brightness of

the instrument cluster will be reduced

slightly unless the instrument panel light

control dial is turned fully on.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not leave the lights on

longer than necessary when the hy-

brid system is not running.

Headlights and turn signals

(without automatic light control system)

105

Daytime running light system*

The headlights turn on at reduced intensi-

ty when the parking brake is released with

the hybrid system started, even with the

light switch in the “OFF” position.

To turn on the other exterior lights and

instrument panel lights, twist the knob to

the position 1.

To turn off the daytime running light sys-

tem, twist the knob to the position 2 with

the headlights on, or turn the hybrid sys-

tem off.

*: Equipped on vehicles sold in Canada

23p003b

High−Low beams—For high beams, turn

the headlights on and push the lever away

from you (position 1). Pull the lever to-

ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light

(blue light) on the instrument panel will

tell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights

(position 3)—Pull the lever all the way

back. The high beam headlights turn off

when you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights

even with the knob turned to “OFF”.

23p004b

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/

turn signal lever up or down to position

The hybrid system must be in the “IG−

ON” mode.

The lever automatically returns after you

make a turn, but you may have to return

it by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the lever

up or down to the pressure point (position

2) and hold it.

106

If the turn signal indicator lights (green

lights) on the instrument panel flash faster

than normal, a front or rear turn signal

bulb is burned out. See “Replacing light

bulbs—” on page 304.

23p005a

To turn on the emergency flashers,

push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn

them off, push the switch once again.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warn

other drivers if your vehicle must be

stopped where it might be a traffic hazard.

Always pull as far off the road as pos-

sible.

The turn signal light switch will not work

when the emergency flashers are operat-

ing.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not leave the lights on

longer than necessary when the hy-

brid system is not running.

Emergency flashers

107

23p006d

To adjust the brightness of the instru-

ment panel lights, turn the dial.

When the headlight switch is turned to the

first or second clickstop, the brightness of

the instrument cluster will be reduced

slightly unless the instrument panel light

control dial is turned fully on.

23p111

To turn on the fog lights, twist the

band of the headlight switch lever to

the position of the fog light. The fog

lights come on only when the head-

lights are on low beam.

The band automatically returns to the

“OFF” position after you release it.

23p126

Front

Rear

Instrument panel light control Front fog lights Interior lights

108

To turn on the interior light, slide the

switch.

The interior light switch has the following

positions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any

door is opened. The light remains on for

15 seconds when all the doors are closed.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

With the switch in the “DOOR” position,

the light comes on when any of the doors

is opened or when you get close to the

front door, carrying the smart key. After all

the doors are closed, the light remains on

for about 15 seconds and then fades out.

However, in the following cases, the light

goes off immediately.

DAll the doors are closed when the hy-

brid system is in “ACC” or “IG−ON”.

DAll the doors are closed and locked.

When all the doors are unlocked, the light

comes on for about 15 seconds and then

fades out, even if the door is not opened.

23P012c

To turn on the personal light, push the

switch. To turn it off, push the switch

again.

23p107

To turn on the luggage compartment

light, push the switch upwards. To turn

it off, push the switch downwards.

The light is located on the left side of the

luggage compartment.

Even if you push the switch upwards, the

light turns off automatically when you

close the back door.

Personal lights Luggage compartment light

109

23p125

For easy access to the key slot, the key

slot light comes on while the interior

light is on.

23p008c

To turn on the windshield wipers, move

the lever to the desired setting.

The hybrid system must be in the “IG−

ON” mode.

Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Slow

Position 3 Fast

For a single sweep of the windshield,

push the lever up and release it.

Twist the interval adjuster upward to

increase the wiping time interval be-

tween sweeps, and downward to de-

crease it.

The wiper lever must be in the “INT” posi-

tion.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever

toward you and release it.

If the windshield wipers are off, they will

operate a couple of times after the washer

squirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,

see “Adding washer fluid” on page 304.

In freezing weather, warm the windshield

with the defroster before using the washer.

This will help prevent the washer fluid

from freezing on your windshield, which

can block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-

shield is dry. It may scratch the

glass.

Key slot light Windshield wipers and

washer

110

23p123

To turn on the rear window wiper, twist

the lever knob upward.

The hybrid system must be in the “IG−

ON” mode.

Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Low speed

Position 2 High speed

To squirt washer fluid on the rear window,

twist the knob upward or downward as far

as it will go (position 3 or 4). The knob

automatically returns from these positions

after you release it.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,

see “Adding washer fluid” on page 304.

NOTICE

Do not operate the rear wiper if the

rear window is dry. It may scratch the

glass. 23p009c

To defog or defrost the rear window,

push the “CLIMATE” button to display

air conditioner screen and touch the

switch.

Operating the steering switch can also de-

fog or defrost the rear window. (See “Cli-

mate remote control” on page 186.)

The hybrid system must be in the “IG−

ON” mode.

The thin heater wires on the inside of the

rear window will quickly clear the surface.

An indicator will come on to indicate the

defogger is operating.

Touch the switch once again to turn the

defogger off.

Rear window wiper and

washer Rear window and outside rear

view mirror defoggers

111

The system will automatically shut off af-

ter the defogger has operated about 15

minutes.

CAUTION

Since the mirror surface can get hot,

do not touch them when the switch

is on.

Make sure you turn the defogger off when

the window is clear. Leaving the defogger

on for a long time could cause the auxilia-

ry battery to discharge. The defogger is

not designed for drying rain water or for

melting snow.

If the outside rear view mirrors are heavi-

ly coated with ice, use a spray de−icer

before operating the switch.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the heater wires or connec-

tors.

112

113

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Gauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators

Fuel gauge 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Odometer and two trip meterss 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Km/h or MPH button 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Low temperature indicator light 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2– 5

114

24p001b

The gauge indicates the approximate

quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

when the “IG−ON” mode is enabled.

Nearly full–Indicator at “F”

Nearly empty–Indicator at “E”

It is a good idea to keep the tank over

1/4 full.

When you refuel on a slope, the indicator

may not show the correct level.

When you refuel less than about 11.4 L

(3.0 gal., 2.5 lmp.gal.), the fuel indicator

may not change.

After the auxiliary battery is reconnected,

one segment will flash for a while.

Depending on the ambient temperature,

the fuel quantity is less than 45 L (11.9

gal., 9.9 lmp. gal.) even at “F”. However,

this does not affect the fuel consumption

and the remaining fuel ratio indicated on

the gauge. (For details, see “Fuel” on

page 204.)

If the fuel gauge display flashes, there

may be a problem in the system. In this

case, contact your Toyota dealer as soon

as possible.

24p002b

Low fuel level indicator light

Blink

If the fuel level approaches “E” or the low

fuel level indicator light blinks, fill the fuel

tank as soon as possible.

Fuel gauge

115

24p109a

At the first blinking of the light, the master

warning light in the instrument cluster

comes on and the message appears on

the multi−information display to remind the

driver to fill fuel.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-

ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level

indicator light may come on earlier than

usual.

24p004e

This meter displays the odometer and

two trip meters.

1. Odometer—Shows the total distance

the vehicle has been driven.

2. Two trip meters—Show two different

distances independently driven since

the last time each trip meter was set

to zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculate

the fuel economy and the other to

measure the distance on each trip. All

trip meter data is cancelled if the elec-

trical power source is disconnected.

3. Trip meter reset button—Resets the

two trip meters to zero, and also

change the meter display.

To change the meter display, quickly

push and release the button. The meter

display changes in the order from the

odometer to trip meter A to trip meter

B, then back to the odometer each

time you push.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-

play the meter A reading, then push

and hold the button until the meter is

set to zero. The same process can be

applied for resetting the trip meter B.

Odometer and two trip

meters

116

Km/h or MPH button

24p005c

You can switch the display between

km/h and MPH by pressing the button.

24p107

This light comes on when the outside

temperature is less than +3_C (37_F).

When the “IG−ON” mode is turned on, this

light comes on and goes out after a few

seconds. If the outside temperature is less

than +3_C (37_F) in the “IG−ON” mode,

the light flashes three times and then

stays on.

If the outside temperature is higher than

+3_C (37_F), the light flashes three times

and then goes out.

Low temperature indicator

light

117

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(a)

(red indicator and buzzer)

If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(yellow indicator)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If red brake system warning light is also on, stop imme-

diately and contact Toyota dealer.

(b)

(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten driver’s seat belt.

(d) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(e) See multi−information display.

(f) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If red brake system warning light is also on, stop imme-

diately and contact Toyota dealer.

If any warning comes on, the hybrid system may not start by pushing the “POWER” switch. In that case, push it once again.

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers

118

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(g) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(h) Close all doors.

(i) Fill up tank.

(j) Replace engine oil

(k) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If red brake system warning light is also on, stop imme-

diately and contact Toyota dealer.

(l) Key reminder buzzer Remove key.

(m) P position reminder

buzzer Push the “P” position switch.

If any warning comes on, the hybrid system may not start by pushing the “POWER” switch. In that case, push it once again.

119

(a) Brake System Warning Lights and

Buzzer

These lights come on in the following

cases when the “IG−ON” mode is enabled.

RED WARNING LIGHT

DWhen the parking brake is applied...

This light comes on when the “IG−ON”

mode is enabled, even after the parking

brake is released.

DWhen the brake fluid level is low...

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue driving

normally when the brake fluid level is

low.

YELLOW WARNING LIGHT

DWhen the regenerative brake system

is fails...

RED OR YELLOW WARNING LIGHT

DWhen the hydraulic brake system

fails...

When the yellow warning light comes on,

it is no problem to continue driving. How-

ever, if the red warning light comes on,

it indicates a serious problem and you can

continue driving no longer.

Have your vehicle checked at your

Toyota dealer in the following cases:

DThe lights do not come on even if the

parking brake is applied when the

“READY” light is on.

DThe lights do not come on even if the

“POWER” switch is pressed with the

parking brake released.

A red warning light turning on briefly dur-

ing operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If any of the following conditions oc-

curs, immediately stop your vehicle at

a safe place and contact your Toyota

dealer.

DThe red warning light does not turn

off even after the parking brake is

released while the hybrid system is

running.

DThe red warning light comes on or

buzzer sounds continuously.

In either case, this can indicate that

the brakes may not work properly and

your stopping distance will become

longer. Depress the brake pedal firmly

and bring the vehicle to an immediate

stop.

DThe brake system warning light re-

mains on together with the “ABS”

and “VSC” warning light.

In this case, not only the anti−lock

brake system and vehicle stability

control system will fail but also the

vehicle will become extremely unsta-

ble during braking.

In the following case, drive directly to

the nearest Toyota dealer.

DThe yellow warning light comes on

while driving.

120

Any of the following conditions may oc-

cur, but do not indicate the malfunc-

tion:

DThe yellow warning light may stay on

for about 60 seconds after “IG−ON”

mode is enabled. It is normal if it turns

off after a while.

DDepressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the red warning light and

buzzer. It is normal if the light turns off

and the buzzer stops sounding after a

few seconds.

DYou may hear a small sound in the

engine compartment after the hybrid

system is started or the brake pedal is

depressed repeatedly. This is a pump

pulsating sound of the brake system,

and it is not a malfunction.

DYou may hear a motor sound in the

engine compartment when the brake

pedal is depressed with the hybrid sys-

tem off.

DThe brake pedal stroke may be short

when you press the “POWER” switch

with the brake pedal depressed.

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light

and Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder to

buckle up the driver’s seat belt.

Once the “IG−ON” mode is enabled, the

reminder light flashes and the buzzer

sounds if the driver’s seat belt is not fas-

tened. Unless the driver fastens the belt,

the light continues flashing and the buzzer

sounds 4 to 8 seconds.

Reminder Light

This light acts as a reminder to have the

front passenger buckle up the seat belt.

Once the “IG−ON” mode is enabled, the

reminder light flashes if a passenger sits

in the front passenger seat and does not

fasten the seat belt. Unless the front pas-

senger fastens the belt, the light continues

flashing.

If luggage or other load is placed on the

front passenger seat, depending on its

weight and how it is placed on the seat,

built−in sensors in the seat cushion may

detect the pressure, causing the reminder

light to flash.

(d) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This lamp comes on when the “IG−ON”

mode is enabled and goes off after the

hybrid system starts. This means that

the warning light system is operating

properly.

If the lamp remains on or the lamp

comes on while driving, first check the

following:

DEmpty fuel tank

If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi-

ately.

This case is a temporary malfunction. The

malfunction indicator lamp will go off after

taking several driving trips.

If the lamp does not go off even after

several trips, contact your Toyota deal-

er as soon as possible.

DThere is a problem somewhere in the

hybrid system or warning light system

itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible to service the vehicle.

121

Emissions inspection and maintenance

(I/M) programs

Your vehicle may not pass a state emis-

sion inspection if the malfunction indicator

lamp remains on. Contact your Toyota

dealer to check your vehicle’s emission

control system and OBD (On−Board Diag-

nostics) system before taking your vehicle

for the inspection.

For details, see “Emissions inspection and

maintenance (I/M) programs” on page 276.

(e) Master Warning Light ( )

If the master warning light comes on, the

warning light for the faulty system is high-

lighted or the message such as “Please

press “P” to engage Park.” and “The bat-

teries will not be charged if the transaxle

is in Neutral N.” appears on the multi−in-

formation display. (See “Service reminder

indicators and warning buzzers— —Multi−

information display” on page 124 or “Pre-

cautions for use” on page 14 or “Fuel

gauge” on page 114 for instructions.)

(f) “ABS” Warning Light

The light comes on when the “IG−ON”

mode is enabled. If the anti−lock brake

system and the brake assist system work

properly, the light turns off after the

“READY” light comes on. Thereafter if the

system malfunctions, the light comes on

again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

anti−lock brake system does not operate,

but the brake system still operates con-

ventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

anti−lock brake system does not operate

but the brake assist system still operates.

In this case, the wheels could lock up

during a sudden braking or braking on

slippery road surfaces.

If either of the following conditions

occurs, this indicates a malfunction

somewhere in the parts monitored by

the warning light system. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible so

service the vehicle.

DThe light does not come on when the

“IG−ON” mode is enabled, or the light

remains on after the “READY” light

comes on.

DThe light comes on while you are driv-

ing.

A warning light turning on briefly during

operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains on

together with the red brake system

warning light, immediately stop your

vehicle at a safe place and contact

your Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lock

brake system will fail but also the

vehicle will become extremely unsta-

ble during braking.

Either of the following conditions may

occur, but does not indicate the mal-

function:

DThe light may stay on for about 60

seconds after the hybrid system is

started. It is normal if it turns off after

a while.

122

DDepressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if

it turns off after a few seconds.

(g) SRS Warning Light

This light will come on when the “IG−

ON” mode is enabled. After about 6

seconds, the light will go off. This

means the system of the airbag and

front seat belt pretensioners are operat-

ing properly.

The warning light system monitors the air-

bag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-

sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-

sors, curtain shield airbag sensors,

driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat

belt buckle switch, front passenger’s seat

belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner

assemblies, warning light, interconnecting

wiring and power sources.

If either of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction somewhere in

the parts monitored by the warning light

system. Contact your Toyota dealer as

soon as possible to service the vehicle.

DThe light does not come on when the

“IG−ON” mode is enabled or remains

on for more than 6 seconds.

DThe light comes on while driving.

(h) Open Door Warning Light

This light remains on until all the doors

are completely closed.

(i) Low Fuel Level Indicator Light

This light blinks when the fuel level in the

tank becomes nearly empty. Fill up the

tank as soon as possible.

At the first blinking of the light, the mes-

sage appears on the display to remind the

driver to fill fuel.

Contact your Toyota dealer in the following

case:

DAll the segments blink.

(j) Engine Oil Replacement Reminder

Light (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

This light acts as a reminder to replace

the engine oil.

This light will come on when the “IG−ON”

mode is enabled, and will go off after

about a few seconds.

When you drive for about 7200 km (4500

miles) after engine oil replacement, this

light illuminates for about 3 seconds and

then flashes for about 12 seconds when

the hybrid system is in the “IG−ON”

mode. If you continue driving without en-

gine oil replacement, and if the driving

range exceeds 8000 km (5000 miles), the

light will come on after the “IG−ON” mode

is enabled. The light will remain on there-

after.

If the light is flashing, we recommend that

you replace the engine oil at an early

opportunity depending on the driving and

road conditions. If the light comes on,

replace the oil as soon as possible.

The system must be reset after the en-

gine oil replacement. Reset the system by

the following procedure:

1. Press the “POWER” switch to the

“OFF” mode with the odometer reading

shown. (For details, see “Odometer and

two trip meters” on page 115.)

2. Press the “POWER” switch twice to

select the “IG−ON” mode while holding

down the trip meter reset button.

123

Hold down the button for at least 5 sec-

onds. The odometer indicates “000000”

and the light goes off.

If the system fails to reset, the light will

remain flashing.

(k) “VSC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problem

somewhere in the vehicle stability control

system.

The light will come on when the “IG−ON”

mode is enabled and will go off after the

“READY” light comes on.

If the light comes on while driving, the

system does not work. However, as con-

ventional braking operates when applied,

there is no problem to continue your driv-

ing.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

DThe warning light does not come on

after the “IG−ON” mode is enabled.

DThe warning light remains on after the

“READY” light comes on.

DThe warning light comes on while you

are driving.

CAUTION

If the “VSC” warning light remains on

together with the red brake system

warning light, immediately stop your

vehicle at a safe place and contact

your Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the vehicle sta-

bility control system will fail but also

the vehicle will become extremely un-

stable during braking.

(l) Key Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer acts as a reminder to remove

the key if you open the driver’s door when

the hybrid system is off and the key is

inserted into the key slot.

(m) Shift Position Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer will sound if the driver’s door

is opened while the hybrid transaxle is in

“N”, “D” or “B”.

CHECKING SERVICE REMINDER INDICA-

TORS (except the low fuel level indica-

tor light)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the doors.

The open door warning light should

come on.

3. Close the door.

The open door warning light should go

off.

4. Press the “POWER” switch twice with-

out pressing the brake pedal to select

the “IG−ON” mode. At this time, all the

bulbs are checked in self−diagnosis

mode.

All the service reminder indicators ex-

cept the open door warning light come

on. The yellow brake system, “ABS”

and “VSC” warning lights go off after

a few seconds.

There may be the case that the yellow

brake system, “ABS” and “VSC” warning

lights stay on for about 60 seconds after

the “IG−ON” mode is enabled. It is normal

if they go out after a while.

If any service reminder indicator or warn-

ing buzzer does not function as described

above, have it checked by your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible.

124

24p006e

If an error occurs in the system, the

warning message and icon appear.

For details on the warning display and

how to remedy the system, see the de-

scription on the following pages.

—Multi−information display

125

If the indicator comes on... Do this.

(a) Stop and check.

(b) Stop and check.

(d) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(e) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(f) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(g) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

126

(a) Discharge Warning Light

This light warns that the auxiliary battery

is being discharged.

If it comes on while you are driving, there

is a problem somewhere in the charging

system.

The hybrid system will continue to oper-

ate, however, until the auxiliary battery is

discharged. Turn off the air conditioning,

blower, radio, etc., and drive directly to

the nearest Toyota dealer or repair shop.

(b) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning

Light

This light warns that the engine oil pres-

sure is too low.

If it stays on while you are driving, pull

off the road to a safe place and stop the

engine immediately. Call a Toyota dealer

or qualified repair shop for assistance.

The light may come on when the oil level

is extremely low. It is not designed to

indicate low oil level, and the oil level

must be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with the

warning light on—even for one block.

It may ruin the engine.

Warning Light

The light operates to warn that the hybrid

system is almost overheating.

If it comes on while you are driving, stop

the vehicle and check your hybrid system.

For detailed instructions, see “If your ve-

hicle overheats” on page 246.

Your vehicle may overheat during severe

operating conditions, such as:

DDriving up a long hill on a hot day.

DReducing speed or stopping after high

speed driving.

NOTICE

zDo not remove the thermostat in

the cooling system as this may

cause the hybrid system to over-

heat. The thermostat is designed to

control the flow of coolant to keep

the temperature of the hybrid sys-

tem within the specified operating

range.

zContinued driving with the light on

could result in the overheating of

hybrid system.

127

(d) Electric Power Steering System

Warning Light

This light comes on when the power

steering control system fails.

CAUTION

If this light comes on, take your ve-

hicle to the Toyota dealer as soon as

possible. In this case, you may feel

the heavy steering wheel maneuver-

ing. Drive your vehicle while gripping

the steering wheel firmly.

(e) Hybrid System Warning Light ( )

This light comes on if there is a problem

in the electric motor, inverter unit, hybrid

vehicle battery, etc.

If this light is on, stop your vehicle in a

safe place immediately and contact your

Toyota dealer.

Even if the hybrid system warning light

comes on, you can temporarily increase

the vehicle speed by depressing the ac-

celerator pedal. Immediately pull up your

vehicle to a safe place and contact your

Toyota dealer.

(f) Hybrid Vehicle Battery Warning

Light

This light comes on in the following

cases.

a. The hybrid vehicle battery voltage

drops when the hybrid transaxle is left in

“N” position.

The system works properly if you put the

hybrid transaxle in “P” position and the

light goes off.

b. The hybrid vehicle battery is dis-

charged.

If this light comes on with the “READY”

light on in case of b., stop your vehicle

in a safe place and contact your Toyota

dealer.

(g) Automatic Headlight Leveling Sys-

tem Warning Light

This light warns that there is a problem

somewhere in the automatic headlight

leveling system.

If it comes on, have your vehicle checked

by your Toyota dealer,

128

129

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

“POWER” switch, Transmission and Parking brake

Push button start system 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hybrid transaxlee 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle stability control system 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parking brake 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cruise control 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2– 6

130

25p118

The push button start system is used to

start or stop the hybrid system and select

“ACC”, “IG−ON” or “OFF” mode. (See

“—Selecting the push button start system

mode” on page 132 and “How to start the

hybrid system” on page 234.) The system

contains the following components.

1. “POWER” switch

2. Key slot

3. Brake pedal

4. Electronic shift lever

21p006a

Your vehicle keys and the key slot are

different shapes from conventional ones.

Keep the following in mind when operating

the key:

DWhen inserting the key, be sure to

push it in all the way.

DWhen pulling out the key, be careful

because it will be pushed out by the

spring and it might fly out.

DIf the key cannot be pulled out, push

it in all the way again, then pull it out.

CAUTION

Do not put your finger into the key

slot. Your finger might be injured.

NOTICE

Observe the following instructions, or

the key mechanism might be damaged

and will not work properly.

zThe key should be operated with a

clean hand and fingers.

zDo not insert the key forcibly.

zDo not insert any key other than

genuine formal keys into the key

slot.

zDo not pull out the key forcibly

when it cannot be removed.

zDo not put water, oil, foreign ob-

jects, etc. into the key slot.

zDo not insert a wet, oily or dam-

aged key into the key slot.

zDo not affix a sticker on the key.

zDo not insert the key in the wrong

way.

Push button start system— —Key slot

131

zDo not pull out the key ring when

removing the key out of the key

slot.

Should you find anything unusual,

contact your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible. 25p113

Press the “POWER” switch slowly and

surely. Quick operation may not activate

the desired mode.

CAUTION

DDo not press the switch while driv-

ing, except in an emergency.

DIn hot weather, the switch surface

may get hot. Take care not to get

burned.

NOTICE

Observe the following instructions or

the push switch start system may not

work properly.

zThe switch should be operated with

a clean finger. Do not use an oily

or dirty finger.

zBe careful not to spill water or oth-

er liquid on the switch.

In the following conditions, contact

your Toyota dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

zIf the indicator on the switch

flashes in amber, the system may

be malfunctioning. Once you turn

the power off, it may not turn on

again.

zIf you find anything unusual in the

switch function, refrain from using

the vehicle.

In the following condition, have your

vehicle inspected by your Toyota deal-

er.

zThe indicator light on the “POWER”

switch does not come on when the

clearance lights are turned on.

—“POWER” switch

132

25p105

Without depressing the brake pedal

Carrying a smart key allows you to op-

erate the “POWER” switch without the

key being inserted into the key slot.

Each time you press the “POWER”

switch briefly without the brake pedal

depressed, the hybrid system mode

changes in the order of “OFF”, “ACC”,

“IG−ON” and then back to “OFF”.

The smart function can be set to become

inoperative using the smart cancel switch.

For details, see “Deactivating the smart

function” on page 33.

1) “ACC” (Green indicator is turned on)

Accessories such as the radio operate.

Pressing the “POWER” switch briefly with-

out depressing the brake pedal in the

“OFF” mode turns on this mode.

In the “ACC” mode, pressing the “POW-

ER” switch briefly while depressing the

brake pedal will start the hybrid system.

If you leave your vehicle in the “ACC”

mode for about an hour, the hybrid system

is automatically turned off.

2) “IG−ON” (Amber indicator is turned

on)

All accessories are operable.

Pressing the “POWER” switch briefly with-

out depressing the brake pedal in the

“ACC” mode turns on this mode.

In the “IG−ON” mode, pressing the “POW-

ER” switch briefly while depressing the

brake pedal will start the hybrid system.

However, if “N” position is selected, the

hybrid system will be turned in the “OFF”

mode.

3) “OFF” (Indicator is turned off)

The hybrid system is off.

You may hear a motor sound in the en-

gine compartment for a few seconds after

the system is turned off and about 90

seconds have passed.

The hybrid vehicle immobilizer system is

automatically set. See “Hybrid vehicle im-

mobilizer system” on page 21.

—Selecting the push button

start system mode

(with smart function—on some

models)

133

25p106

With the brake pedal depressed

The hybrid system will start and stop

by pressing the “POWER” switch briefly

with the brake pedal depressed.

You may hear a motor sound in the en-

gine compartment when the brake pedal is

depressed with the hybrid system off.

1) “START” (Amber indicator comes on

for a few seconds.)

The hybrid system is ready to operate

and all accessories are operable. (“IG−

ON”)

Press the “POWER” switch with the brake

pedal depressed.

For starting tips, see “How to start the

hybrid system—” on page 234.

If in an emergency, you must turn the

hybrid system off while the vehicle is

moving, press the “POWER” switch for

more than 3 seconds. At this time, the

“ACC” mode and shift position “N” are

automatically enabled.

2) “OFF” (Indicator is turned off)

The hybrid system is off.

You may hear a motor sound in the en-

gine compartment for a few seconds after

the system is turned off and about 90

seconds have passed.

The hybrid vehicle immobilizer system is

automatically set. See “Hybrid vehicle im-

mobilizer system” on page 21.

NOTICE

zThe hybrid system cannot be

started when the shift position is in

“N”. Be sure to put it in “P” and

then start the system.

zDo not leave the hybrid system in

“ACC” or “IG−ON” for a long time.

The auxiliary battery will discharge.

zThe hybrid mode in which the bat-

tery is discharged or disconnected

is retained in memory, and that

mode is turned on when power is

applied.

When you leave your vehicle, be sure to

turn the “POWER” switch off and carry the

smart key.

If you get out of your vehicle while carry-

ing a key without turning off the “POWER”

switch and then close the door, a warning

tone sounds inside and beeps sound out-

side.

134

INFORMATION

You can insert a genuine key while in

the “IG−ON” mode or with the hybrid

system starting. Do not insert any key

other than genuine keys. 25p103

Without depressing the brake pedal

Each time you press the “POWER”

switch briefly without the brake pedal

depressed, the hybrid system mode

changes in the order of “OFF”, “ACC”,

“IG−ON” and then back to “OFF”.

1) “ACC” (Green indicator is turned on)

Accessories such as the radio operate.

Pressing the “POWER” switch briefly with-

out depressing the brake pedal in the

“OFF” mode turns on this mode.

The key can be removed at this position.

The hybrid system is automatically turned

off.

In the “ACC” mode, pressing the “POW-

ER” switch briefly while depressing the

brake pedal will start the hybrid system.

If you leave your vehicle in the “ACC”

mode for about an hour, the hybrid system

is automatically turned off.

2) “IG−ON” (Amber indicator is turned

on)

All accessories are operable.

Pressing the “POWER” switch briefly with-

out depressing the brake pedal in the

“ACC” mode turns on this mode.

In the “IG−ON” mode, pressing the

“POWER” switch briefly while depressing

the brake pedal will start the hybrid sys-

tem. However, if “N” position is selected,

the hybrid system will be turned in the

“OFF” mode.

3) “OFF” (Indicator is turned off)

The hybrid system is off. The key can

be removed at this position.

You may hear a motor sound in the en-

gine compartment for a few seconds after

the system is turned off and about 90

seconds have passed.

Once you remove the key, the hybrid ve-

hicle immobilizer system is automatically

set. See “Hybrid vehicle immobilizer sys-

tem” on page 21.

—Selecting the push button

start system mode

(without smart function)

135

25p104

With the brake pedal depressed

The hybrid system will start and stop

by pressing the “POWER” switch briefly

with the brake pedal depressed.

You may hear a motor sound in the en-

gine compartment when the brake pedal is

depressed with the hybrid system off.

1) “START” (Amber indicator comes on

for a few seconds.)

The hybrid system is ready to operate

and all accessories are operable. (“IG−

ON”)

Insert the key and press the “POWER”

switch briefly with the brake pedal de-

pressed.

For starting tips, see “How to start the

hybrid system—” on page 234.

If, in an emergency, you must turn the

hybrid system off while the vehicle is

moving, press the “POWER” switch more

than 3 seconds. At this time, the “ACC”

mode and shift position “N” are automati-

cally enabled.

2) “OFF” (Indicator is turned off)

The hybrid system is off. The key can

be removed at this position.

You may hear a motor sound in the en-

gine compartment for a few seconds after

the system is turned off and about 90

seconds have passed.

Once you remove the key, the hybrid ve-

hicle immobilizer system is automatically

set. See “Hybrid vehicle immobilizer sys-

tem” on page 21.

NOTICE

zThe hybrid system cannot be

started when the shift position is in

“N”. Be sure to put it in “P” and

then start the system.

zDo not leave the hybrid system in

“ACC” or “IG−ON” for a long time.

The auxiliary battery will discharge.

zThe hybrid mode in which the bat-

tery is discharged or disconnected

is retained in memory, and that

mode is turned on when power is

applied.

136

Hybrid transaxle

Your hybrid transaxle has an electronic

shift lever system to minimize incorrect

operation. This means you can only shift

to other position from “P” when the brake

pedal is depressed.

With the following improper shifting, the

rejection function operates and a beep

sounds so the hybrid transaxle cannot be

shifted.

(i) When you attempt to shift the transaxle

from the “P” position without depress-

ing the brake pedal.

(ii) When you push the “P” switch while

driving.

(iii) When you operate the shift lever from

“D” to “R” or vice versa while the ve-

hicle is moving.

(iv) When you operate the shift lever to “B”

from any position other than “D”.

In case of (i), the transaxle remains in

“P”. In case of (ii) through (iv), the trans-

axle is automatically shifted to “N”.

25p002i

Shift lever

The shift lever always re-

turns to this original position

after shifting operation.

“P” position switch

You can operate the shift

lever only in “D”.

Keep the shift lever in “N”

for a while after you shift it

to that position.

137

25p003a

(a) Shift lever

The shift position is displayed on the in-

strument cluster.

R: Reverse position (buzzer sounds)

N: Neutral position

D: Normal driving position

B: Engine braking position

(shown only while in “D”)

NOTICE

Observe the following instructions.

Otherwise, the lever may cause a mal-

function, resulting in trouble:

zDo not remove the knob on the le-

ver.

zDo not use a knob other than the

originally fitted knob.

zDo not hang anything on the lever.

Should you find anything unusual,

contact your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible.

(b) “P” position switch

The “P” (parking) position is displayed on

the instrument cluster, and the indicator

on the “P” position switch comes on.

1. Start the hybrid system as instructed in

“How to start the hybrid system” on

page 234.

2. With your foot holding down the brake

pedal, shift the shift lever to “D”.

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-

tor pedal while shifting. Doing so can

cause abrupt acceleration.

3. Release the parking brake and brake

pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal

slowly for smooth starting.

When you shift the transaxle to “D”

while backing up, an alarm sounds and

the transaxle is shifted to “N”.

138

25p004c

(d) Using engine braking

To use engine braking, shift the shift lever

to “B” position.

During high speed driving, you may feel

that deceleration by engine braking is less

than that of a typical vehicle.

Do not continue normal driving with the

transaxle in “B” for a long time. This may

cause decreased fuel economy. To prevent

this, use “D” for normal driving.

When you shift the transaxle to “B” from

a position other than “D”, an alarm sounds

and the transaxle is automatically shifted

to “N”.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on a

slippery surface. Abrupt shifting

could cause the vehicle to skid or

spin.

(e) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down with

your foot, shift the shift lever to the

“R” position. You will hear beeps while

the transaxle is in “R”.

When you shift the transaxle to “R” while

driving, an alarm sounds and the transaxle

is shifted to “N”.

(f) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down,

fully depress the parking brake pedal

to apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,

push the “P” position switch.

If you press the “POWER” switch while

stopping, the transaxle is automatically

shifted to the “P” and the hybrid system

is turned off.

If the driver’s door is opened when the

transaxle is in “N”, “D” or “B”, beep

sounds and a warning message appears

on the multi−information display to warn

you to shift the transaxle to “P”.

If you push the “P” position switch while

driving, an alarm sounds and the transaxle

is automatically shifted to “N”.

NOTICE

Be sure to put the hybrid transaxle in

“P” when parking. In “N”, the hybrid

vehicle battery will not be charged

even if the gasoline engine is run-

ning. You cannot start your vehicle if

the transaxle is left in “N” for a long

time because the hybrid vehicle bat-

tery will discharge.

When shifting the transaxle from “P” on

the slope, a large parking lock releasing

noise will be generated. However, this

does not indicate a malfunction.

139

(g) Vehicle driving characteristics

Creeping

In order to hold the vehicle properly on an

incline and for better accelerator pedal

operation at starting, your vehicle is de-

signed like a typical automatic transmis-

sion vehicle which tends to move without

depressing the accelerator pedal with the

transaxle in a position other than “P” or

“N”.

With the transaxle in a position other than

“P” or “N”, depress the brake pedal firmly

even when stopped and apply the parking

brake as required.

When moving in a compact area or during

a traffic jam, it is an effective way to

control the speed using only the brake

pedal operation without depressing the ac-

celerator pedal.

Regenerative brake

When the accelerator pedal is released or

the brake pedal is depressed, the electric

motor acts as a generator and converts

kinetic energy to electric energy to provide

deceleration and recover electric energy to

charge the hybrid vehicle battery.

At this time, the electric motor running

noise may increase.

The operation is the same as a typical

gasoline powered vehicle.

You may experience the following condi-

tion while braking. As they do not indicate

a malfunction, perform braking as usual:

DIn the “OFF” mode, pressing the

“POWER” switch once or twice will se-

lect “ACC” or “IG−ON” only if the brake

pedal is not depressed. In this condi-

tion, the brake pedal may move a little.

Hybrid driving

This vehicle runs in combination with the

gasoline engine and electric motor.

If the “READY” light is on, you can start

your vehicle even with the gasoline engine

stopped.

(h) If the system malfunctions

In the following conditions, there is some

problem in the system.

DThe indicator on the “P” position switch

flashes. However, this does not indi-

cate a malfunction unless a warning

message appears in the multi−informa-

tion display.

DAll frames of shift position indicators in

the instrument cluster flash.

DThe parking system error message ap-

pears on the multi−information display.

DThe instrument cluster and multi−infor-

mation display does not come on when

the “IG−ON” mode is enabled.

In these cases, stop your vehicle in a

safe and level place, apply the parking

brake securely and contact your Toyota

dealer immediately.

(i) When the auxiliary battery is dis-

connected

Before you disconnect the auxiliary bat-

tery, confirm the shift position is “P” and

apply the parking brake completely.

After you reconnect the auxiliary battery,

shift the shift lever to “N” and confirm the

shift position is in “N” when the “IG−ON”

mode is enabled.

140

The vehicle stability control system

helps provide integrated control of the

systems such as anti−lock brake sys-

tem, brake assist system, hybrid system

control, etc. This system automatically

controls the brakes and hybrid system

to help prevent the vehicle from skid-

ding when cornering on a slippery road

surface or operating steering wheel

abruptly.

This system activates when the vehicle

speed is more than about 15 km/h (9

mph).

CAUTION

DDo not rely exclusively on the ve-

hicle stability control system. Even

if the vehicle stability control sys-

tem is operating, you must always

drive carefully and attentively to

avoid serious injury. Reckless driv-

ing will result in an unexpected ac-

cident. If the slip indicator light

flashes, sounding an alarm, special

care should be taken while driving.

DOnly use tires of specified size. The

size, manufacturer, brand and tread

pattern for all 4 tires should be the

same. If you use tires other than

specified, or mixed types or size,

the vehicle stability control system

may not function correctly. When

replacing the tires or wheels, con-

tact your Toyota dealer. (See

“Checking and replacing tires” on

page 293.)

25p115

Slip indicator light

If the vehicle is going to skid during driv-

ing, the slip indicator light blinks and an

alarm sounds intermittently. Special care

should be taken while driving.

The slip indicator light blinks in the follow-

ing conditions also.

DThe vehicle tires are racing. Utmost

care is required when driving.

DWhen the anti−lock brake system is

operating. See “Brake system” on page

211 for details.

Vehicle stability control

system

141

The slip indicator light comes on when the

“IG−ON” mode is enabled and will go off

after the “READY” light comes on. If the

indicator light does not come on when the

ignition is turned on, contact your Toyota

dealer.

25p117

“VSC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problem

somewhere in the vehicle stability control

system.

The light will come on when the “IG−ON”

mode is enabled and will go off after the

“READY” light comes on.

If the light comes on while driving, the

system does not work. However, because

the conventional braking still operates, you

can drive your vehicle without damaging

it. Contact your Toyota dealer.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

DThe warning light does not come on

after the “IG−ON” mode is enabled.

DThe warning light remains on after the

“READY” light comes on.

DThe warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

142

25p008a

Vehicles sold in U.S.A.

25p009a

Vehicles sold in Canada

When parking, firmly apply the parking

brake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

To set: Fully depress the parking brake

pedal. For better holding power, first de-

press the brake pedal and hold it while

setting the parking brake.

To release: Depress the parking brake

pedal while depressing the brake pedal.

To remind you that the parking brake is

set, the parking brake reminder light in

the instrument panel remains on until you

release the parking brake.

CAUTION

DDriving with the parking brake en-

gaged can reduce braking power.

DBefore driving, be sure the parking

brake is fully released and the park-

ing brake reminder light is off.

Cruise control

The cruise control allows you to cruise

the vehicle at a desired speed over 40

km/h (25 mph) even with your foot off

the accelerator pedal.

Your cruising speed can be maintained up

or down grades within the limits of hybrid

system performance, although a slight

speed change may occur when driving up

or down the grades. On steeper hills, a

greater speed change will occur so it is

better to drive without the cruise control.

CAUTION

DTo help maintain maximum control

of your vehicle, do not use the

cruise control when driving in

heavy or varying traffic, or on slip-

pery (rainy, icy or snow–covered) or

winding roads.

DAvoid vehicle speed increases when

driving downhill. If the vehicle

speed is too fast in relation to the

cruise control set speed, cancel the

cruise control then shift the shift

lever to “B” position to use engine

braking to slow down.

Parking brake

143

25p006a

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON

To operate the cruise control, push the

“ON·OFF” switch. This turns the system

on. The indicator light in the instrument

panel shows that you can now set the

vehicle at a desired cruising speed. Anoth-

er push on the switch will turn the system

completely off.

CAUTION

To avoid accidental cruise control en-

gagement, keep the “ON·OFF” switch

off when not using the cruise control.

25p007a

SETTING AT A DESIRED SPEED

The transaxle must be in “D” before you

set the cruise control speed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,

push the lever down in the “– SET” direc-

tion and release it. This sets the vehicle

at that speed.

If the speed is not satisfactory, tap the

lever up for a faster speed, or tap it down

for a slower speed. Each tap changes the

set speed by 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph). You can

now take your foot off the accelerator

pedal.

If you need acceleration—for example,

when passing—depress the accelerator

pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed

the set speed. When you release it, the

vehicle will return to the speed set prior

to the acceleration.

CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEED

You can cancel the preset speed by:

a. Pulling the control lever in the

“CANCEL” direction and releasing it.

b. Depressing the brake pedal.

If the vehicle speed falls below about 40

km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will auto-

matically cancel out.

If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10

mph) below the preset speed, the preset

speed will also automatically cancel out.

If the preset speed automatically cancels

out other than for the above cases, have

your vehicle checked by your Toyota deal-

er at the earliest opportunity.

144

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

Push the lever up in the “+ RES” direction

and hold it. Release the lever when the

desired speed is attained. While the lever

is held up, the vehicle will gradually gain

speed.

However, a faster way to reset is to ac-

celerate the vehicle and then push the

control lever down in the “– SET” direc-

tion.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

Push the lever down in the “– SET” direc-

tion and hold it. Release the lever when

the desired speed is attained. While the

lever is held down, the vehicle speed will

gradually decrease.

However, a faster way to reset is to de-

press the brake pedal and then push the

control lever down in the “– SET” direc-

tion.

RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED

If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling

the control lever or by depressing the

brake pedal, pushing the lever up in the

“+ RES” direction will restore the speed

set prior to cancellation.

However, once the vehicle speed falls be-

low about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset

speed will not be resumed.

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

If the “CRUISE” indicator light in the

instrument cluster flashes when using the

cruise control, press the “ON·OFF” button

to turn the system off and then press it

again to turn it on.

If any of the following conditions then oc-

curs, there is some trouble in the cruise

control system.

DThe indicator light does not come on.

DThe indicator light flashes again.

DThe indicator light goes out after it

comes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyota

dealer and have your vehicle inspected.

145

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Multi−information display

Reference 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Before using the multi−information displayy 147. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Switch operation 147. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Functions 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Information 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adjustment 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Outside temperature display 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2– 7

146

Reference

1. Multi−information display*

(See page 147 for details.)

2. “DISPLAY” button

The display adjustment screen is

shown.

(See page 152 for details.)

3. “INFO” button

The information menu screen is shown.

(See page 150 for details.)

4. “CLIMATE” button

The air conditioning operation screen is

shown.

(See page 180 for details.)

5. “AUDIO” button

The audio operation screen is shown.

(See page 156 for details.)

6. “INFO” button (on the steering pad)

The trip information screen is shown.

(See page 151 for details.)

*: In this manual, English version screens

are shown as an example.

26p045c

Type A (with Navigation system)

Type B (without Navigation system)

147

26p049b

When the “ACC” mode is enabled, the

initial screen appears and the system be-

gins operating.

After a few seconds, the previous mode

display will appear.

If the electrical power source has been

disconnected from the multi−information

display, the display will be automatically

set to the initial mode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while the

vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust

the display only when the vehicle is

stopped.

Switch operation

This system operates mainly by the

switches on the screen. To protect the

screen, lightly touch switches on the

screen with your finger. When you touch

a switch on the screen or on the bezel,

a beep sounds.

DIf the system does not respond to a

touch of a switch, move your finger

away from the screen and then touch

it again.

DYou cannot operate dimmed switches.

DWipe off fingerprints on the surface of

the display using a glass cleaning

cloth.

Before using

the multi−information display

148

Functions

26p170

With Navigation system*

26p027c

Without Navigation system

*: For other functions (Maintenance, Tele-

phone and Calender), see the separate

“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

1. Trip information, Language and

Screen setting

For details, see page 150. 26p026b

2. Adjustment

The contrast and brightness on the screen

are adjusted. For details, see page 152.

149

26p114a

3. Air conditioner

Climate setting operations are available.

For details, see page 180.

26p136a

4. Audio

The radio and cassette tape operations

are available. For details, see page 156.

24p006e

5. Warning display

The warning symbol for the faulty system

is appeared. For details, see page 124.

150

Information

26p009b

Type A Type B

Push the “INFO” button to display the

“Information Menu” screen.

26p027c

Trip information: The energy monitor and

fuel consumption screen are selected.

Language: Select language screen is

shown.

Screen setting: The screen setting screen

is shown.

—Trip information

26p038d

Energy monitor screen

Touch the “Energy” switch. Vehicle driving

condition, hybrid system operating condi-

tion and energy recovery condition are

shown.

1. Indicates the flow of energy by orange

and yellow arrows. While the energy is

recovered, the arrows change the

pointing direction and turn green.

2. Indicates the remaining capacity of the

hybrid vehicle battery.

The screen display updates every 3 sec-

onds, so it may not coincide with the

actual status.

151

26p039c

Fuel consumption screen

Touch the “Consumption” switch. Average

fuel consumption, momentary fuel con-

sumption and recovered energy are

shown.

1. Indicates the past momentary fuel con-

sumption every 5 minutes.

2. Indicates the energy recovered for 5

minutes with symbols. One symbol re-

fers to 50 Wh or the energy by which

a 50 W bulb illuminates for an hour.

Up to 4 symbols will be shown.

3. Indicates the current momentary fuel

consumption.

4. Indicates the average fuel consumption

after being reset. When the “Reset”

switch is touched or more than 10 L

(2.6 gal., 2.2 Imp.gal.) fuel is supplied,

the average fuel consumption is reset.

26P180

Steering switch operation

(with Navigation system)

The trip information screen appears direct-

ly by pressing the “INFO” button on the

right side of the steering pad. Each press

changes the “Energy Monitor” and “Con-

sumption” screens alternately.

152

26p115

You can select the language shown on

the screen. Touch your desired switch

on the screen.

—Screen setting

26p030c

AUTOMATIC TRANSITION

The function returning to the previous

screen from the audio or air conditioner

screen is selectable. Select “ON” or

“OFF” and then touch “OK”.

ON: The previous screen automatically re-

turns from the audio or air condition-

er screen 20 seconds after the end

of audio or air conditioner screen op-

eration.

OFF:The audio or air conditioner screen

remains on.

BACKGROUND COLOR

Select the desired background color

and touch “OK”.

Adjustment

26p024a

Type A Type B

Push the “DISPLAY” button to display

the “Display” screen.

—Language

153

26p026b

Contrast and brightness adjustment

CONTRAST “+”:

Strengthens the contrast of the screen.

CONTRAST “–”:

Weakens the contrast of the screen.

BRIGHTNESS “+”: Brightens the screen.

BRIGHTNESS “–”: Darkens the screen.

The screen turns off when you touch the

“SCREEN OFF”. To turn the display

screen back on, push any bezel switch

such as “INFO”, etc. The selected screen

appears.

26P051b

Depending on the position of the head-

light switch, the screen changes to the

day mode or night mode.

To display the screen in the day mode

even with the headlight switch on, touch

“DAY MODE” on the adjustment screen for

brightness and contrast control.

However, if the km/h or MPH button is on,

mode switching cannot be done. It re-

mains in the day mode. In this case, “DAY

MODE” is not shown on the screen.

If the screen is set in the day mode with

the headlight switch turned to on, this

condition is memorized in the system even

with the hybrid system turned off.

Outside temperature display

26p046b

The outside temperature is shown rang-

ing from −30_C (−22_F) up to 50_C

(122_F) at the upper right of the energy

consumption or energy monitor screen

or the upper left of the air conditioner

screen.

154

155

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Audio system

Reference 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using your audio systemm 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Radio operation 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cassette tape player operation 166. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Compact disc player operation 169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Audio remote controls 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Audio system operating hints 174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2– 8

156

1. Multi−information display screen*

(See page 160 for details.)

2. Ejecting a compact disc

(See page 170 for details.)

3. Compact disc slot

(See page 169 for details.)

4. Frequency tuning

(See page 163 for details.)

5. Scan tuning

(See page 164 for details.)

6. Compact disc mode button

(See page 169 for details.)

7. Radio mode button

(See page 163 for details.)

8. Radio mode: Seek tuning

(See page 164 for

details.)

Compact disc

mode: Direct access to a

desired program

(See page 172 for

details.)

9. Adjusting the volume

(See page 159 for details.)

10. Turning the system on

(See page 159 for details.)

11. Audio operation screen display button

(See page 160 for details.)

*: In this manual, English version screens

are shown as an example.

Reference

"Type 1

26p014c

With

Navigation

System

157

1. Multi−information display screen*

(See page 160 for details.)

2. Compact disc slot

(See page 169 for details.)

3. Ejecting a compact disc

(See page 170 for details.)

4. Radio mode button

(See page 163 for details.)

5. Frequency tuning

(See page 163 for details.)

6. Stopping and ejecting a casette tape

(See page 166 for details.)

7. Scan tuning

(See page 164 for details.)

8. Tape or Compact disc mode button

(See page 166 or 169 for details.)

9. Casette tape slot

(See page 166 for details.)

10. Radio mode: Seek tuning

(See page 164 for

details.)

Tape or Compact

disc mode: Direct access to a

desired program

(See page 168 or 172

for details.)

11. Turning the system on

(See page 159 for details.)

"Type 2

26p110a

With

Navigation

System

158

12. Adjusting the volume

(See page 159 for details.)

13. Compact disc load button

(See page 169 for details.)

14. Audio operation screen display button

(See page 160 for details.)

*: In this manual, English version screens

are shown as an example.

This section describes some of the basic

features of the Toyota audio system.

Some information may not pertain to your

system.

Your audio system works when the hybrid

system is in “ACC” or “IG−ON”.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not leave the audio on

longer than necessary when the

hybrid system is not running.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Push “PWR” button to turn the audio sys-

tem on and off. The system turns on in

the last mode used.

Using your audio system—

—Some basics

159

VOLUME CONTROL

To adjust the volume, push and turn the

“VOL”.

Type 1

Type 2

Push the “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE” “DISC”

or “TAPE·DISC” button to turn on that

mode. The selected mode turns on di-

rectly.

Push these buttons if you want to switch

from one mode to another.

If the tape or disc is not set, the cassette

player or compact disc player does not

turn on.

You can turn off the cassette player by

ejecting the cassette tape. If the audio

system was previously off, then the entire

audio system will be turned off when you

eject the cassette tape. If another function

was previously playing, it will come on

again.

160

26p136a

Radio

26p137a

Casette tape

26p138a

Compact disc (Type 1)

26p149b

Compact disc (Type 2)

The switches for radio, cassette tape

and compact disc player operation are

displayed on the liquid crystal display.

Touch them lightly and directly on the

screen.

The selected switch is highlighted in

green.

161

26p140a

TONE AND BALANCE

Touching the “SOUND” switch on the

screen displays the sound adjustment

screen.

BASS “+” or “–”: Adjusts low−pitched

tones.

MID “+” or “–” (Type 2 only): Adjusts

mid−pitched tones.

TREB “+” or “–”: Adjusts high−pitched

tones.

“FRONT” or “REAR”: Adjusts sound bal-

ance between the front and rear speakers.

“L” or “R”: Adjusts sound balance be-

tween the left and right speakers.

“OK”: The previous screen returns.

How good an audio program sounds to

you is largely determined by the mix of

the treble, mid−range, and bass levels.

In fact, different kinds of music and vocal

programs usually sound better with differ-

ent mixes of treble, mid−range and bass.

A good balance of the left and right stereo

channels and of the front and rear sound

levels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening to

a stereo recording or broadcast, changing

the right/left balance will increase the vol-

ume of one group of sounds while de-

creasing the volume of another.

162

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

To remove an antenna on the roof, care-

fully turn it counterclockwise.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the antenna,

make sure to remove it before driving

your Toyota through an automatic car

wash.

YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER

When you insert a cassette, the exposed

tape should be to the right.

NOTICE

Do not oil any part of the player and

do not insert anything other than cas-

sette tapes into the slot, or the tape

player may be damaged.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER

When you insert a disc, gently push it in

with the label side up.

The discs set in the player are played

continuously, starting with disc number 1.

The disc number of the disc currently be-

ing played, the track number and the time

from the beginning of the program appear

on the display.

Type 2 only:

When play of one disc ends, the first

track of the following disc starts. When

play of the final disc ends, play of the

first disc starts again.

The player will skip any empty disc num-

ber.

NOTICE

zDo not stack up two discs for in-

sertion, or it will cause damage the

compact disc player. Insert only one

compact disc into slot at a time.

zNever try to disassemble or oil any

part of the compact disc player. Do

not insert anything other than com-

pact discs into the slot.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm

(4.7 in.) discs only.

163

(a) Listening to the radio

Push these buttons to choose either an

AM or FM station.

“AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” appears on the dis-

play.

Push and turn this knob to step up the

station band or to step down.

Your radio automatically changes to stereo

reception when a stereo broadcast is re-

ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If the

signal becomes weak, the radio reduces

the amount of channel separation to pre-

vent the weak signal from creating noise.

If the signal becomes extremely weak, the

radio switches from stereo to mono recep-

tion. In this case, “ST” disappears from

the display.

26p141a

(b) Presetting a station

1. Tune in the desired station.

2. Touch one of the station selector

switches (1−6) and hold it until a

beep is heard. This sets the station

to the switch and the frequency ap-

pears on the switch.

Each switch can store FM1, FM2 and AM.

To change the preset station to a different

one, follow the same procedure.

The preset station memory is cancelled

when the power source is interrupted by

battery disconnection or a blown fuse.

Radio operation

164

Tune in the desired station using one of

the following methods.

Preset tuning: Touch the switch (1−6) for

the station you want. The switch (1−6) is

highlighted in green and station frequency

appears on the display.

Manual tuning: Turn the “TUNE” knob

briefly. Each time you turn the knob, the

radio will step up or down to another fre-

quency.

Seek tuning: Push the “SEEK TRACK”

button on either side. The radio will begin

seeking up or down for a station of the

nearest frequency and will stop on recep-

tion. Each time you push the button, the

stations will be searched out one after

another.

26p126

Scan tuning: Push the “SCAN” button or

touch the “SCAN” switch (AM mode only)

briefly. “SCAN” appears on the display.

The radio will find the next station up or

down the band, stay there for a few se-

conds, and then scan again. To select a

station, push the “SCAN” button a second

time.

Preset scan tuning: Push the “SCAN”

button or touch the “SCAN” switch (AM

mode only) and hold it until you hear a

beep. “P. SCAN” appears on the display.

The radio will tune in the next preset sta-

tion up or down the band, stay there for

a few seconds, and then move to the next

preset station. To select a station, push

the “SCAN” button a second time.

26p142a

(d) RDS (Radio Data System)

(1) Program type

Each time you touch the “TYPE A” or

“TYPE "” switch, the program type

changes as in the following:

DROCK

DEASY LIS (Easy listening)

DCLS JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)

DR&B (Rhythm and Blues)

DINFORM (Information)

DRELIGION

DMISC

DALERT (Emergency message)

165

26p143a

When you touch the “TYPE A” or “TYPE

"”, “TYPE SEEK” switch appears. Touch

the switch and the system starts to seek

the station in the relevant program type.

(2) Traffic program:

A station that regularly broadcasts traf-

fic information is automatically located.

When you touch the “TRAF” switch,

“TRAF SEEK” appears on the display and

the radio will start seeking any traffic pro-

gram station.

If any traffic program station is not found,

“NOTHING” appears and the previous

mode returns.

If the traffic program station is found, the

name for traffic program station is dis-

played and “TRAF” is lit for a while until

traffic announcement is received.

26p144a

(3) Radio text

If the system receives a radio text from

RDS station, “MSG” appears on the dis-

play. Touch the “MSG” switch, and a text

message is displayed on the screen.

166

26p145b

In case a text message is not accepted

in a screen, you can touch the “MSG”

switch and hold it to display the rest of

the message.

When the system can show the station

name, “RDS” appears on the display.

Each time you touch the “MSG” switch,

indication on the display changes from the

band to the station name, a radio text in

this order. After six seconds passes, indi-

cation returns to the band.

26p127

(a) Playing a cassette tape

When you insert a cassette tape, the

exposed tape should face to the right.

The player will automatically start when

you insert a cassette tape. At this time,

“Tape” appears on the display.

If a metal or chrome equivalent cassette

tape is put in the cassette player, the

player will automatically recognize it and

“MTL” appears on the display.

To stop or eject the cassette tape, push

the “ ” button.

26p146a

If a cassette is already in the slot, push

the “TAPE” button.

Dolbyr Noise Reduction* feature: If you

are listening to a tape that was recorded

with Dolbyr B Noise Reduction, touch the

“” switch. The “ ” switch will be

highlighted in green. Touch the switch

again to turn off Dolbyr B NR.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise

by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-

tion, play your tapes with this switch on

or off according to the mode used for

recording the tape.

Cassette tape player operation

(Type 2 only)

167

* Dolby noise reduction manufactured un-

der license from Dolby Laboratories Li-

censing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the

double−D symbol are trademarks of

Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. 26p147a

(b) Manual program selection

Reverse switch: You can reverse the tape

by touching the “ A"

” switch. The dis-

play will show the opposite direction after

reversing the tape. Also if the tape reach-

es the end of one side, it is automatically

reversed to the other side.

Fast forward and Rewind switches: You

can fast forward or fast rewind by touch-

ing the “AA” or “""” switch.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-

ing, touch “""”, to stop the tape while

it is rewinding, touch “AA”.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette

player will stop and then play the same

side. If a tape fast forwards completely,

the cassette player will play the other side

of the tape using the auto−reverse feature.

Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette

player reaches the end of a tape, it auto-

matically reverses and begins to play the

other side, regardless of whether the cas-

sette was playing or fast forwarding.

168

26p148a

“RPT” switch: The repeat feature auto-

matically replays the current program.

Touch the “RPT” switch while the program

is playing. When the program ends, it will

automatically be rewound and replayed.

Touch the switch again to turn off the

repeat feature.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blank

space between programs for the repeat

feature to work correctly.

“SKIP” switch: The skip feature allows

you to fast forward past long stretches of

blank tape. This is especially useful at the

end of cassettes.

Touch the “SKIP” switch. The player will

automatically skip any blank portions of 15

seconds or more and play the next pro-

gram. To cancel it, touch the switch once

again.

“SEEK TRACK” button

You can skip forward or skip rewind by

pushing the “SEEK TRACK” button on ei-

ther side. You like to choose within pre-

vious 9 tracks and next 9 tracks being

played. Press the start of track button as

many as you like to skip (3 times if you

like to skip to the third track).

When the end of the tape is reached, the

player automatically reverses sides and

resumes normal play.

When the beginning of the tape is

reached, the player automatically resumes

normal play.

169

The hybrid system must be in “ACC” or

“IG−ON”.

(a) Inserting or ejecting compact disc

Type 1:

When you insert a disc, the player will

automatically start. To eject the disc,

push the “ ” button.

Type 2:

DSetting a single compact disc:

1. Push the “LOAD” button briefly.

The umber indicators at both ends of the

slot blinking. The umber blinking indicators

changes to continuous green illumination.

2. Insert only one disc.

You can set a disc at the lowest empty

disc number.

After insertion, the set disc is automatical-

ly loaded.

If the label faces down, the disc cannot

be played. In this case, “CD CHECK” ap-

pears on the display.

If you need to insert the next disc, repeat

the same procedure to insert another disc.

DSetting all the discs:

1. Push the “LOAD” button until you

hear a beep.

The umber indicators at both ends of the

slot blinking. The umber blinking indicators

changes to continuous green illumination.

2. Insert only one disc.

The umber indicators blink.

3. Insert the next disc after the umber

blinking indicators changes to con-

tinuous green illumination.

4. Repeat this procedure until you in-

sert all the discs.

To cancel the operation, push the “LOAD”

button.

Your automatic changer can store up to 6

discs.

If you do not insert the discs within 15

seconds after pushing the “LOAD” button,

the operation will be canceled automatical-

ly.

NOTICE

Do not insert one disc stacked on top

of another one or feed them in con-

tinuously, to prevent discs from get-

ting stuck in the player.

Compact disc player operation

170

26p129a

DEjecting a single alone:

1. Touch the switch (1−6) to highlight

the disc number you want to eject.

2. Push the “ ” button for the com-

pact disc briefly.

At this time, the umber indicators of the

slot start blinking.

DEjecting all the discs:

Push the “ ” button for the compact

disc until you hear a beep.

26p149b

The numbers of the trays where the com-

pact disc is not set are dimmed.

(b) Playing a compact disc (Type 1)

Push the “DISC” button if the disc are

already loaded in the player.

“CD” appears on the display.

The discs set in the player are played

continuously. The track number and the

time from the beginning of the program

are shown on the display.

171

(b) Playing a compact disc (Type 2)

Push the “TAPE·DISC” button if the

disc are already loaded in the player.

“CD CHANGER” appears on the display.

The discs set in the player are played

continuously, starting with the last disc

you inserted. The disc number of the disc

currently being played, the track number

and the time from the beginning of the

program are shown on the display.

When play of one disc ends, the first

track of the following disc starts. When

play of the final disc ends, play of the

first disc starts again.

The player will skip any empty disc trays.

26p149b

(Type 2 only)

Touch the desired disc number.

The selected disc number is highlighted in

green.

The player will start playing the selected

disc from the first track.

26p151b

(d) Searching for a desired disc

(Type 2 only)

Touch the “DISC SCAN” switch.

With “DISC SCAN” highlighted in green ,

the program at the beginning of each disc

will be played for 10 seconds. To continue

listening to the program of your choice,

touch the “DISC SCAN” switch a second

time.

After all the tracks are scanned in one

pass, normal play resumes.

172

26p130

(e) Selecting a desired track

“SEEK TRACK” button: Use for direct

access to a desired track.

Push either side of the “SEEK TRACK”

button. The player will start playing the

selected track from the beginning.

Fast forward: Touch the “ ” switch and

hold it to fast forward the disc. When you

release the switch, the compact disc play-

er will resume playing from that position.

Reverse: Touch the “ ” switch and hold

it to reverse the disc. When you release

the switch, the compact disc player will

resume playing.

26p152b

(f) Searching for a desired track

Touch the “SCAN” switch.

“Scan” will be highlighted in green. The

compact disc player will play the next

track for 10 seconds, then scan again.

To select a track, touch the “SCAN”

switch a second time. If the player reach-

es the end of the disc, it will continue

scanning at track 1.

After all the tracks are scanned in one

pass, normal play resumes.

26p153c

(g) Other compact disc player functions

“RPT” switch: Use it for automatic repeat

of the track you are currently listening to.

Touch the switch while the track is play-

ing. When the track is finished, the player

will automatically go back to the beginning

of the track and play the track again. To

cancel it, touch the switch once again.

“DISC RPT” switch (Type 2 only): Use

it for automatic repeat of the disc you are

currently listening to.

Touch the switch while the disc is playing.

When the disc is finished, the player will

automatically go back to the beginning of

the disc and play the disc again. To can-

cel it, touch the button once again.

173

“RAND” switch: Use it for automatic and

random selection of the disc which you

are currently listening to.

When the switch is touched, the system

selects a track in the disc you are cur-

rently listening to. To cancel it, touch the

switch once again.

“DISC RAND” switch (Type 2 only): Use

it for automatic track selection for all the

discs and play by the system.

When the switch is touched, the system

selects a track in the discs of all the

trays which are set and plays it. To can-

cel it, touch the switch once again.

When a track is skipped or the system is

inoperative, touch the switch to reset.

“TITLE” switch: Use it for displaying the

disc and track title while the CD−TEXT

disc is playing.

The switch is not displayed on the screen

while the CD−TEXT disc is not playing.

Up to 29 letters can be displayed. To

cancel it, touch the “TITLE OFF” switch.

(h) If the player malfunctions

If the player or another unit equipped with

the player malfunctions, our audio system

will display one of the following error mes-

sages.

If “CD CHECK” appears on the display,

it indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged

or it was inserted up side down. Clean the

disc or insert it correctly.

If “CD ERROR” appears on the display,

the following causes are possible.

DThere is trouble inside the system.

Eject the disc.

DThe inside of the player unit may be

too hot due to the very high ambient

temperature. Eject the disc and allow

the player to cool down.

If the malfunction is not rectified, take

your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

26p112

The switches are installed on the left side

of the steering pad.

“MODE” switch: Use this switch to

change the mode. If a tape or compact

disc is not inserted, the “TAPE” or “CD”

mode is skipped. When you push the

switch with the audio system turned off,

the audio system turns on.

“” switches: Use this switches to ad-

just the volume. Push “+” to increase the

volume and “–” to decrease the volume.

The volume continues to increase or de-

crease while the switch is being pressed.

Audio remote controls

(steering switches)

174

(a) When the radio mode is selected

“” or “ ” switch: Push this switch for

seek tuning or to select a station.

DTo select a preset station, push the

switch briefly. Do this again to select

the next preset station.

DTo seek a station, push and hold the

switch until you hear a beep. Do this

again to find the next station. If you

push the switch on either side of the

“Ɲ” or “Ɯ” during the seek mode,

seeking will be canceled.

DTo step up or down the frequency,

push and hold the switch even after

you hear a beep. When you release

from the switch, the radio will begin

seeking up or down for a station. Do

this again to find the next station.

(b) When the “TAPE” mode is selected

“” or “ ” switch: Push this switch to

fast forward or rewind the tape or for

automatic program selection.

DPush this switch until you hear a beep

to fast forward or rewind the tape. To

stop fast forwarding or rewinding, push

the same side on the switch until you

hear a beep.

DPush this switch briefly for automatic

program selection. When automatically

selecting a program, you can skip up

to 9 programs at a time. For details,

see page 168.

“” or “ ” switch: Use this switch to

select a desired track or disc.

DPush this switch briefly to select a de-

sired track.

DTo select a desired disc, push and hold

this switch until the desired number of

the disc appears and you hear a beep.

CAUTION

Operate the switches with due care

while you are driving to avoid acci-

dents.

NOTICE

To ensure correct audio system op-

erations:

zBe careful not to spill beverages

over the audio system.

zDo not put anything other than a

cassette tape into the cassette tape

slot.

zThe use of a cellular phone inside

or near the vehicle may cause a

noise from the speakers of the au-

dio system which you are listening

to. However, this does not indicate

a malfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio reception

does not mean there is a problem with

your radio—it is just the normal result of

conditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terrain

can interfere with FM reception. Power

lines or telephone wires can interfere with

AM signals. And of course, radio signals

have a limited range. The farther you are

from a station, the weaker its signal will

be. In addition, reception conditions

change constantly as your vehicle moves.

Audio system operating hints

175

Here are some common reception prob-

lems that probably do not indicate a prob-

lem with your radio:

Fading and drifting stations—Generally, the

effective range of FM is about 40 km (25

miles). Once outside this range, you may

notice fading and drifting, which increase

with the distance from the radio transmit-

ter. They are often accompanied by distor-

tion.

Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,

making it possible for two signals to reach

your antenna at the same time. If this

happens, the signals will cancel each oth-

er out, causing a momentary flutter or

loss of reception.

Static and fluttering—These occur when

signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or

other large objects. Increasing the bass

level may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping—If the FM signal you

are listening to is interrupted or weak-

ened, and there is another strong station

nearby on the FM band, your radio may

tune in the second station until the origi-

nal signal can be picked up again.

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected by

the upper atmosphere—especially at night.

These reflected signals can interfere with

those received directly from the radio sta-

tion, causing the radio station to sound

alternately strong and weak.

Station interference—When a reflected sig-

nal and a signal received directly from a

radio station are very nearly the same

frequency, they can interfere with each

other, making it difficult to hear the broad-

cast.

Static—AM is easily affected by external

sources of electrical noise, such as high

tension power lines, lightening, or electri-

cal motors. This results in static.

CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER

AND TAPES

For the best performance for your cas-

sette player and tapes:

Clean the tape head and other parts regu-

larly.

DA dirty tape head or tape path can

decrease sound quality and tangle your

cassette tapes. The easiest way to

clean them is by using a cleaning tape.

(A wet type is recommended.)

Use high−quality cassettes:

DLow−quality cassette tapes can cause

many problems, including poor sound,

inconsistent playing speed, and

constant auto−reversing. They can also

get stuck or tangled in the cassette

player.

DDo not use a cassette if it has been

damaged or tangled or if its label is

peeling off.

DDo not leave a cassette in the player

if you are not listening to it, especially

if it is hot outside.

DStore cassettes in their cases and out

of direct sunlight.

DAvoid using cassettes with a total play-

ing time longer than 100 minutes (50

minutes per side). The tape used in

these cassettes is thin and could get

stuck or tangled in the cassette player.

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISC

PLAYER AND DISCS

DThe player is intended for use with

12cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

DExtremely high temperatures can keep

your compact disc player from working.

On hot days, use the air conditioning

to cool the vehicle interior before you

listen to a disc.

176

DBumpy roads or other vibrations may

make your compact disc player skip.

DIf moisture gets into your compact disc

player, you may not hear any sound

even though your compact disc player

appears to be working. Remove the

disc from the player and wait until it

dries.

CAUTION

Compact disc players use an invisible

laser beam which could cause hazard-

ous radiation exposure if directed

outside the unit. Be sure to operate

the player correctly.

DUse only compact discs marked as

shown above. The following products

may not be playable on your compact

disc player.

Copy−protected CD

CD−R (CD−Recordable)

CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)

CD−ROM

Special shaped discs

Z17058

Transparent/translucent discs

177

Low quality discs

Labeled discs

NOTICE

Do not use special shaped, transpar-

ent/translucent, low quality or labeled

discs such as those shown in the il-

lustrations. The use of such discs

may damage the player or changer, or

it may be impossible to eject the

disc.

Correct Wrong

DHandle compact discs carefully, espe-

cially when you are inserting them.

Hold them on the edge and do not

bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints

on them, particularly on the shiny side.

DDirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or

other disc damage could cause the

player to skip or to repeat a section of

a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the

disc up to the light.)

DRemove discs from the compact disc

player when you are not listening to

them. Store them in their plastic cases

away from moisture, heat, and direct

sunlight.

178

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a

soft, lint−free cloth that has been damp-

ened with water. Wipe in a straight line

from the center to the edge of the disc

(not in circles). Dry it with another soft,

lint−free cloth. Do not use a conventional

record cleaner or anti−static device.

179

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Air conditioning system

Controls 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Climate remote control 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument panel ventss 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air conditioning filter 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2– 9

180

1. Outside temperature display

2. Passenger compartment temperature

display

3. Air flow control switch

4. Fan speed control switch

5. Temperature control switch

6. OFF switch

7. Automatic control switch

8. Rear window and outside rear view

mirror defogger switch (See page 110

for details.)

9. Front windshield switch

10. Air intake control switch

11. Air conditioning operation screen dis-

play button

12. Air conditioning on−off switch

In this manual, English version screens

are shown as an example.

Controls

27P010g

Type A

(with Navigation system)

Type B

(without Navigation system)

181

The automatic air conditioning automat-

ically maintains the set temperature.

This air conditioning features automatic

fan speed and air flow control which auto-

matically selects the most suitable fan

speed and air flow to control the tempera-

ture. The hybrid system must be in the

“IG−ON” mode.

CLIMATE: Push this button to display

switches for automatic air conditioning

controls.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not leave the air condi-

tioning on longer than necessary

when the hybrid system is not operat-

ing.

27p005a

Air flow selection

: In the beginning of the automatic air flow mode, air might be delivered.

182

SETTING OPERATION—automatic con-

trol

27p111a

1. Touch the “AUTO” switch.

The indicator located in the instrument

cluster will come on.

Air conditioning is turned on if not oper-

ated.

Air flow quantity, switching of the diffus-

ers, and switching of the air intake be-

tween RECIRCULATED AIR and OUTSIDE

AIR are automatically adjusted. The opera-

tion status is shown by each indicator.

However, if the RECIRCULATED AIR

mode is selected manually, automatic con-

trol of air intake cannot be activated.

When one of the manual control buttons

is depressed while operating in automatic

mode, the mode relevant to the depressed

button is set. Other conditions continue to

be adjusted automatically. However, oper-

ating the air flow outlets or fan speed will

turn off the automatic control.

Touch the “OFF” switch to turn the air

conditioning off.

27p112a

2. Use the “TEMP” switch to set the

desired temperature.

The temperature of air delivered to the

passenger compartment will be controlled

automatically according to the setting.

(a) Climate control

183

SETTING OPERATION—manual control

When one of the manual control

switches is touched while operating in

automatic mode, the mode relevant to

the touched switch is set. Other condi-

tions continue to be adjusted automati-

cally.

If manual air flow selection is desired—

27p113a

The outlets from which air is delivered

can be selected manually by touching the

switch. The function of each mode is as

follows:

1. Panel—Air flows mainly from the

instrument panel vents.

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floor

vents and the instrument panel vents.

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor

vents.

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainly

from the floor vents and windshield

vents.

The selected mode is highlighted in green.

If quick heating or cooling is desired—

27p112a

Touch the “TEMP” switch and hold it until

the maximum figure or minimum figure ap-

pears.

184

If manual fan speed control is desired—

27p114a

1. Fan speed at low

2. Fan speed at high

The fan speed can be set to your desired

speed by touching the appropriate air flow

control switch. The higher the fan speed

is, the more air is delivered. Touching the

“OFF” switch turns off the fan.

To remove exterior windshield frost, use the

high speed setting.

The selected mode is highlighted in green.

If manual switching of air intake is de-

sired—

27p115a

The air intake control switch is used to

switch the air intake between the OUT-

SIDE AIR mode and RECIRCULATED AIR

mode.

With the switch in the OUTSIDE AIR

mode, the system will take fresh outside

air into the vehicle.

If quick circulation of cooled air is de-

sired, touch the air intake control switch

for RECIRCULATED AIR.

The indicator will come on in the instru-

ment cluster while the RECIRCULATED

AIR mode is selected.

If recirculated air is used during heating,

the windows will fog up more easily.

If the hybrid system is turned off in the

OUTSIDE AIR mode, the automatic control

of the air intake is activated when the

hybrid system is turned on again.

2−way air intake control

To improve fuel economy, OUTSIDE AIR

mode control changes when the air in-

take selector is set in OUTSIDE AIR on

the following conditions:

DWhen the maximum heating is needed

with the air flow in “Floor” or “Floor/

Windshield”, fresh air flows in the up-

per compartment, while air is recircu-

lated in the lower compartment.

DWhen cooling is needed, both fresh

and recirculate modes turns on.

185

If manual on−off of the air conditioning

is desired—

Touch the “A/C” switch to turn the air

conditioning on and touch it again to turn

the air conditioning off.

If the system is used for ventilation, heat-

ing in dry weather or removing frost or

exterior fog on the windshield, turn the air

conditioning off once it is no longer re-

quired. This will improve fuel economy.

The air conditioning can be used for year−

round automatic temperature control in-

cluding cooling and dehumidifying opera-

tion.

27p116a

To remove interior fog on the wind-

shield—

Touch the front windshield switch.

To remove frost or exterior fog on the

windshield—

1. Touch the upper side of the tempera-

ture control switch until maximum fig-

ure appears on the temperature dis-

play.

2. Touch the front windshield switch.

3. Push the “HI” of the air flow control

switch to obtain a maximum air flow.

4. Leave the air conditioning on−off button

off.

When the front windshield switch is

touched, the air conditioning is set to op-

erate and the OUTSIDE AIR mode is set.

If you touch the front windshield switch

once again while in the FRONT WIND-

SHIELD mode, the mode then returns to

the last mode used.

The indicator will come on in the instru-

ment cluster while the FRONT WIND-

SHIELD mode is on.

CAUTION

Do not use the front windshield

switch during cooled air operation in

extremely humid weather. The differ-

ence between the temperature of the

outside air and that of the windshield

could cause the outer surface of the

windshield to fog up blocking your

vision.

(b) Windshield defogging and

defrosting

186

27p126

DThe light sensor is located on the driv-

er’s side edge of the instrument panel.

If you put anything on this area or

cover the area, the sensor function

may be adversely affected.

DTo cool off your Toyota after it has

been parked in the hot sun, drive with

the windows open for a few minutes.

This vents the hot air, allowing the air

conditioning to cool the interior more

quickly.

DMake sure the air intake grilles in front

of the windshield are not blocked (by

leaves or snow, for example).

DOn humid days, do not blow cold air

on the windshield. The windshield could

fog up because of the difference in air

temperature on the inside and outside

of the windshield.

DKeep the area under the front seats

clear to allow air to circulate through-

out the vehicle.

DOn cold days, set the fan speed to

high for a minute to help clear the

intake ducts of snow or moisture. This

can reduce the amount of fogging on

the windows.

DWhen driving on dusty roads, close all

windows. If dust thrown up by the ve-

hicle is still drawn into the vehicle after

closing the windows, it is recommended

that the air intake selector be set to

OUTSIDE AIR and the fan speed se-

lector to any setting except “OFF”.

DIf following another vehicle on a dusty

road, or driving in windy and dusty

conditions, it is recommended that the

air intake selector be temporarily set to

RECIRCULATE, which will close off the

outside passage and prevent outside

air and dust from entering the vehicle

interior.

27p104

The switches are installed on both sides

of the steering pad.

“A/C AUTO” switch: Use this switch to

turn on the automatic mode. (For details,

see page 182.) Pressing this switch in the

automatic control turns the blower off.

“TEMP ” switch: Use this switch to

set the desired temperature. (For details,

see page 182.)

“” switch: Use this switch to change

the air intake mode. (For details, see

page 184.)

“” switch: Use this switch to remove

interior fog on the windshield. (For details,

see page 185.)

(steering switches)

187

“” switch: Use this switch to turn on

or off the rear window and outside rear

view mirror defoggers. (For details, see

page 110.)

CAUTION

Operate the switches with due care

while you are driving to avoid acci-

dents.

27p006a

If air flow control is not satisfactory, check

the instrument panel vents. The instrument

panel vents may be opened or closed as

shown.

82p109

The air conditioning filter information

label is placed on the left side of the

glove box as shown and indicates that

a filter has been installed.

The air conditioning filter prevents dust

from entering the vehicle through the air

conditioning vent.

Instrument panel vents Air conditioning filter—

188

82p006b

The air conditioning filter is set behind

the glove box.

The air conditioning filter may clog af-

ter long use. The filter may need to be

replaced if the air flow of the air condi-

tioning and heater experiences extreme

reductions in operating efficiency, or if

the windows begin to fog up easily.

To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,

inspect and replace the air conditioning

filter according to the maintenance sched-

ule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy

traffic flow, such as inner city or desert

areas, early replacement may be required.

(For scheduled maintenance information,

please refer to the “Owner’s Manual Sup-

plement/Scheduled Maintenance”.)

82p007a

1. Open the glove box, and slide off

the damper as shown.

—Checking and replacing the

air conditioning filter

189

82p107

2. Push in each side of the glove box

to disconnect the claws.

82p008b

3. Pull the filter case toward you to

take it out.

82p009a

4. Remove the filter from the filter case

and replace it with a new one.

190

5. Install the filter and filter case in the

reverse order of removal.

Set the filter in the filter case correctly.

INFORMATION

The air filter should be installed prop-

erly in position. The use of air condi-

tioning with the air filter removed

may cause deteriorated dustproof per-

formance and then affect air condi-

tioning performance.

191

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Other equipment

Clock 192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power outletss 192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear console box 193. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Glove boxes 193. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Garage door opener 194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auxiliary boxes 197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cup holders 198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bottle holders 198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tie−down hooks 199. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Luggage storage box 199. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Luggage cover 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Floor mat 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2– 10

192

Clock

28p009d

The digital clock indicates the time.

The hybrid system must be in “ACC” or

“IG−ON”.

To set the hour: Push the “H” button.

To set the minutes: Push the “M” button.

If the electrical power source has been

disconnected from the clock, the time dis-

play will automatically be set to 1:00.

When the instrument panel lights are

turned on, the brightness of the time indi-

cator will be reduced.

Power outlets

28p010a

Instrument panel

28p107

Rear console box

The power outlets are designed for

power supply for car accessories.

The hybrid system must be in “ACC” or

“IG−ON” for the power outlets to be used.

NOTICE

zTo prevent the fuse from being

blown, do not use the electricity

over the total vehicle capacity of

12V/120W.

zTo prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not use the power

outlet longer than necessary when

the hybrid system is not operating.

zClose the power outlet lid when the

power outlet is not in use. Inserting

anything other than an appropriate

plug that fits the outlet, or allowing

any liquid to get into the outlet

may cause electrical failure or short

circuits.

193

Rear console box

28p012c

To use the rear console box, open as

shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

When opening the rear console box,

take due care not to catch your fin-

gers.

28p002a

Upper glove box

28p105

Lower glove box

To open the glove boxes, push the each

button.

The inside of the upper glove box is sepa-

rated by the partition. In case storing a

longer object, remove the partition.

With the instrument panel lights on, the

lower glove box light will come on when

the lower glove box is open.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the glove box doors

closed while driving.

Glove boxes

194

28p108

Indicator light

Buttons

The garage door opener (HomeLinkR

Universal Transceiver) is manufactured

under license from HomeLinkR and can

be programmed to operate garage

doors, gates, entry doors, door locks,

home lighting systems, and security

systems, etc.

(a) Programing the HomeLinkR

The HomeLinkR in your vehicle has 3

buttons and you can store one program

for each button.

To ensure correct programing into the

HomeLinkR, install a new battery in the

hand−held transmitter prior to program-

ming.

The battery side of the hand−held trans-

mitter must be pointed away from the

HomeLinkR during the programming pro-

cess.

For Canadian users, follow the procedure

in “Programming an entrance gate/Pro-

gramming all devices in the Canadian

market”.

1. Decide which of 3 HomeLinkR buttons

you want to program.

2. Place your hand−held garage transmit-

ter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from

the surface of the HomeLinkR.

Keep the red indicator light on the

HomeLinkR in view while programming.

3. Simultaneously press and hold the

hand−held garage transmitter button

along with the selected HomeLinkR but-

ton.

4. When the indicator light on the

HomeLinkR changes from a slow to a

rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can

release both buttons.

5. Test the operation of the HomeLinkR by

pressing the newly programmed button.

If programming a garage door opener,

check to see if the garage door opens

and closes.

If the garage door does not operate, iden-

tify if your garage transmitter is of the

“Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the

programmed HomeLinkR button. The ga-

rage door has the rolling code feature if

the indicator light (on the HomeLinkR)

flashes rapidly and then remains lit after

2 seconds. If your garage transmitter is

the “Rolling Code” type, proceed to the

heading “Programming a rolling code sys-

tem”.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each re-

maining HomeLinkR button to program

another device.

Garage door opener

195

Programming a rolling code system

If your device is “Rolling Code”

equipped, it is necessary to follow

steps 1 through 4 under the heading

“Programming the HomeLinkR” before

proceeding with the steps listed below.

1. Locate the “training” button on the ceil-

ing mounted garage door opener motor.

The exact location and color of the

button may vary by brand of garage

door opener. Refer to the owner’s

guide supplied by the garage door

opener manufacturer for the location of

this “training” button.

2. Press the “training” button on the ceil-

ing mounted garage door opener motor.

Following this step, you have 30 seconds

in which to initiate step 3 below.

3. Press and release the vehicle’s pro-

grammed HomeLinkR button twice. The

garage door may open. If the door

does open, the programming process is

complete. If the door does not open,

press and release the button a third

time. This third press and release will

complete the programming process by

opening the garage door.

The ceiling mounted garage door opener

motor should now recognize the

HomeLinkR unit and be able activate the

garage door up/down.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 each remain-

ing HomeLinkR button to program

another rolling code system.

Programming an entrance gate/Program-

ming all devices in the Canadian market

1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLinkR but-

tons you want to program.

2. Place your hand−held gate/device

transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)

away from the surface of the

HomeLinkR.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLinkR

in view while programming.

3. Press and hold the selected

HomeLinkR button.

4. Continuously press and release (cycle)

the hand−held gate/device transmitter

button every two seconds until step 5

is complete.

5. When the indicator light on the

HomeLinkR changes from a slow to a

rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can

release both buttons.

6. Test the operation of the HomeLinkR by

pressing the newly programmed button.

Check to see if the gate/device oper-

ates correctly.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each re-

maining HomeLinkR button to program

another device.

Programming other devices

To program other devices such as home

security systems, home door locks or

lighting, contact your authorized Toyota

dealer for assistance.

Reprogramming a button

Individual HomeLinkR buttons cannot be

erased, however, to reprogram a single

button, follow the procedure “Programming

the HomeLinkR”.

(b) Operating the HomeLinkR

To operate the HomeLinkR, press the ap-

propriate HomeLinkR button to activate the

programmed device. The HomeLinkR indi-

cator light should come on. The

HomeLinkR continues to send the signal

for up to 20 seconds as long as the but-

ton is pressed.

196

memory (all three programs)

To erase all previously programmed codes

at one time, press and hold down the 2

outside buttons for 20 seconds until the

indicator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase

the programs stored in the HomeLinkR

memory.

CAUTION

DWhen programming the HomeLinkR

Universal Transceiver, you may be

operating a garage door or other

device. Make sure people and ob-

jects are out of the way of the ga-

rage door or other device to pre-

vent potential harm or damage.

DDo not use this HomeLinkR Univer-

sal Transceiver with any garage

door opener that lacks the safety

stop and reverse feature as re-

quired by federal safety standards.

(This includes any garage door

opener model manufactured before

April 1, 1982.) A garage door open-

er which cannot detect an object

(signaling the door to stop and re-

verse), does not meet current feder-

al safety standards. Using a garage

door opener without these features

increases risk of serious injury or

death.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with RSS−210 of the IC

Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING: This transmitter has been

tested and complies with FCC and IC

Rules. Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

device.

197

To use the box, open the lid as shown

in the following illustrations.

CAUTION

DTo reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden

stop, always keep the auxiliary box

closed while driving.

DAuxiliary box on the ceiling—

As this box is designed for holding

a light object such as an eyeglass,

do not place any heavy objects in

it. Heavy objects may cause the

holder to open and contents to fly

out resulting in injuries.

NOTICE

Auxiliary box on the ceiling—

In hot weather, inside of the vehicle

ceiling becomes very hot. Do not

leave anything flammable or deform-

able such as a lighter, the glasses,

etc. inside.

28p117

Front ceiling

28p011c

Front side of the console box

28p003a

On the instrument panel

28p111

Left side of the luggage compartment

Auxiliary boxes

198

28p005b

For front seats

28p006b

For rear seats

The cup holder is designed for holding

cups or drink−cans securely.

To use the cup holder, open the lid.

CAUTION

DDo not place anything else other

than cups or drink−cans on the cup

holder, as such items may be

thrown about in the compartment

and possibly injure people in the

vehicle during sudden braking or in

an accident.

DTo reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden

stop while driving, keep the cup

holder closed when not in use.

DTake due care not to catch your

fingers when the cup holder is

opened.

28p109

The bottle holders are designed to hold

bottles securely.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to use the holder for

any other purpose for which it was

intended. Inappropriately sized or

shaped objects may be thrown about

in the compartment and possibly in-

jure people in the vehicle during a

sudden braking or an accident.

Cup holders Bottle holders

199

NOTICE

Do not put a cup or open bottle in

the bottle holder because the con-

tents may spill when the door opens

or closes. 22p120

To secure your luggage, use the tie−

down hooks as shown above.

See “—Stowing precautions” on page 228

for precautions when loading luggage.

CAUTION

To avoid personal injury, keep the tie−

down hooks retracted when not in

use.

28p112a

1. To open the luggage storage box, turn

the knob to the “UNLOCK” position and

open the lid.

Tie−down hooks Luggage storage box

200

28p113a

2. Hold the lid open by inserting the sup-

port rod into the slot.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

keep the luggage storage box closed

and locked while driving.

28p114

To use the luggage cover, pull it out of

the retractor and hook it on the an-

chors.

CAUTION

Do not place anything on the luggage

cover. Such items may be thrown

away and possibly injure people in

the vehicle during sudden braking or

a collision.

28p115

To remove the luggage cover, lift it up.

Luggage cover

201

28p116a

You can stow the luggage cover in the

luggage storage box in the luggage

compartment as shown in the illustration.

At that time, adjust the cover so that

“TOP” is facing up.

After removing the luggage cover, stow it

in the luggage storage box or place it

somewhere other than the passenger

compartment. This will prevent passengers

from being injured in the event of a sud-

den stop or accident.

28p125

To replace the luggage cover, adjust the

cover so that “TOP” is facing upwards.

28p007b

Use a floor mat of the correct size.

If the floor carpet and floor mat have 2

holes, then they are designed for use with

locking clips. Fix the floor mat with lock-

ing clips into the holes in the floor carpet.

Floor mat

202

28p008b

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properly

placed on the floor carpet. If the floor

mat slips and interferes with the

movement of the pedals during driv-

ing, it may cause an accident.

203

INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOUR

TOYOTA

Break−in period 204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel 204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel pump shut−off systemm 206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operation in foreign countries 206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Three−way catalytic converters 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine exhaust cautions 208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Facts about engine oil consumption 208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Coolant heat storage system 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Iridium−tipped spark plugs 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brake system 211. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electric power steering system 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brake pad wear limit indicators 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Your Toyota’s identification 216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Theft prevention labels 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Suspension and chassis 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tire information 218. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle load limits 228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cargo and luggage 228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Types of tires 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3

204

Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

Your vehicle does not need an elaborate

break−in. But following a few simple tips

for the first 1000 km (600 miles) can add

to the future economy and long life of

your vehicle:

DAvoid full−throttle acceleration when

starting and driving.

DAvoid racing the hybrid engine.

DTry to avoid hard stops during the first

300 km (200 miles).

FUEL TYPE

Your vehicle must use only unleaded

gasoline.

To help prevent gas station mixups, your

Toyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.

The special nozzle on pumps with un-

leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-

dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will

not.

At a minimum, the gasoline you use

should meet the specifications of ASTM

D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93

in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of

leaded gasoline will cause the three−

way catalytic converter to lose its ef-

fectiveness and the emission control

system to function improperly. Also,

this can increase maintenance costs.

OCTANE RATING

Select unleaded gasoline with an Oc-

tane Rating of 87 (Research Octane

Number 91) or higher.

Use of unleaded fuel with an octane num-

ber or rating lower than stated above will

cause persistent heavy knocking. If se-

vere, this will lead to engine damage.

If your engine knocks...

If you detect heavy knocking even when

using the recommended fuel, or if you

hear steady knocking while holding a

steady speed on level roads, consult your

Toyota dealer.

However, occasionally, you may notice

light knocking for a short time while accel-

erating or driving up hills. This is normal

and there is no need for concern.

GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENT

ADDITIVES

Toyota recommends the use of gasoline

that contains detergent additives to

avoid build−up of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.

contains detergent additives to keep clean

and/or clean intake systems.

Break−in period Fuel

205

QUALITY GASOLINE

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,

Europe and Japan have developed a

specification for quality fuel named

World−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that

is expected to be applied world wide.

The WWFC consists of four categories

that depend on required emission le-

vels. In the U.S., category 4 has been

adopted. The WWFC improves air quali-

ty by providing for better emissions in

vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction

through better vehicle performance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

Cleaner burning gasoline, including re-

formulated gasoline that contains oxy-

genates such as ethanol or MTBE is

available in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleaner

burning gasoline and appropriately blended

reformulated gasoline. These types of gas-

oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-

mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-

prove air quality.

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

Toyota allows the use of oxygenate

blended gasoline where the oxygenate

content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%

MTBE. If you use gasohol in your

Toyota, be sure that it has an octane

rating no lower than 87.

Toyota does not recommend the use of

gasoline containing methanol.

GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT

Some gasoline contain an octane en-

hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-

clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use of

gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-

taining MMT is used, your emission con-

trol system may be adversely affected.

The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-

strument cluster may come on. If this hap-

pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-

vice.

GASOLINE QUALITY

In a very few cases, you may experience

driveability problems caused by the partic-

ular gasoline that you are using. If you

continue to have unacceptable driveability,

try changing gasoline brands. If this does

not rectify your problem, then consult your

Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

zDo not use gasohol other than

stated above. It will cause fuel sys-

tem damage or vehicle performance

problems.

zIf drivability problems are encoun-

tered (poor hot starting, vaporizing,

engine knock, etc.), discontinue its

use.

zTake care not to spill gasohol dur-

ing refueling. Gasohol may cause

paint damage.

206

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

45 L (11.9 gal., 9.9 lmp.gal.)

The given fuel tank capacity is measured

on EPA/CARB ORVR testing condition

which is approved for nominal capacity

measurement condition.

The fuel tank capacity is decreased at low

ambient temperature. (decreased by about

5 L (1.3 gal., 1.1 lmp.gal.) at −10_C

(14_F).)

Fuel pump shut−off system

The fuel pump shut−off system stops sup-

plying fuel to the engine to minimize the

risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls

or an airbag inflates upon collision. To

restart the hybrid system after the fuel

pump shut−off system activates, press the

“POWER” switch to the “OFF” mode and

start it.

CAUTION

Inspect the ground under the vehicle

before restarting the hybrid system. If

you find that liquid has leaked onto

the ground, the fuel system has been

damaged and it is in need of repair.

In this case, do not restart the hybrid

system.

If you plan to drive your Toyota in

another country...

First, comply with the vehicle registration

laws.

Second, confirm the availability of the cor-

rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octane

number).

Operation in foreign

countries

207

30p001d

The three−way catalytic converters are

emission control devices installed in

the exhaust system.

Its purpose is to reduce pollutants in the

exhaust gas.

CAUTION

DKeep people and combustible mate-

rials away from the exhaust pipe

while the engine is running. The

exhaust gas is very hot.

DDo not drive, idle or park your ve-

hicle over anything that might burn

easily such as grass, leaves, paper

or rags.

NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gases

flowing into the three−way catalytic

converter may cause it to overheat

and create a fire hazard. To prevent

this and other damage, observe the

following precautions:

zUse only unleaded gasoline.

zDo not drive with an extremely low

fuel level; running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, creat-

ing an excessive load on the three−

way catalytic converter.

zDo not turn off the ignition while

the vehicle is moving.

zKeep your engine in good running

order. Malfunctions in the engine

electrical system, electronic ignition

system/distributor ignition system

or fuel system could cause an ex-

tremely high temperature.

zIf the engine becomes difficult to

start or stalls frequently, take your

vehicle in for a check−up as soon

as possible. Remember, your Toyota

dealer knows your vehicle and its

three−way catalytic converter sys-

tem best.

zTo ensure that the three−way cata-

lytic converter and the entire emis-

sion control system operate proper-

ly, your vehicle must receive the

periodic inspections required by the

Toyota Maintenance Schedule. For

scheduled maintenance information,

refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-

ment”.

Three−way catalytic converters

208

CAUTION

DAvoid inhaling the engine exhaust.

It contains carbon monoxide, which

is a colorless and odorless gas. It

can cause unconsciousness or even

death.

DMake sure the exhaust system has

no holes or loose connections. The

system should be checked from

time to time. If you hit something,

or notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust, have the system

checked immediately.

DDo not run the hybrid system in a

garage or enclosed area except for

the time needed to drive the vehicle

in or out. The exhaust gases cannot

escape, making this a particularly

dangerous situation.

DDo not remain for a long time in a

parked vehicle with the hybrid sys-

tem running. If it is unavoidable,

however, do so only in an uncon-

fined area and adjust the heating or

cooling system to force outside air

into the vehicle.

DKeep the back door closed while

driving. An open or unsealed back

door may cause exhaust gases to

be drawn into the vehicle.

DTo allow proper operation of your

vehicle’s ventilation system, keep

the inlet grilles in front of the wind-

shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-

er obstructions.

DIf you smell exhaust fumes in the

vehicle, drive with the windows

open and the back door closed.

Have the cause immediately located

and corrected.

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL

Engine oil has the primary functions of

lubricating and cooling the inside of the

engine, and plays a major role in main-

taining the engine in proper working order.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

It is normal that an engine should con-

sume some engine oil during normal

engine operation. The causes of oil

consumption in a normal engine are as

follows.

DOil is used to lubricate pistons, piston

rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil

is left on the cylinder wall when a

piston moves downwards in the cylin-

der. High negative pressure generated

when the vehicle is decelerating sucks

some of this oil into the combustion

chamber. This oil as well as some part

of the oil film left on the cylinder wall

is burned by the high temperature com-

bustion gases during the combustion

process.

Engine exhaust cautions Facts about engine oil

consumption

209

DOil is also used to lubricate the stems

of the intake valves. Some of this oil

is sucked into the combustion chamber

together with the intake air and is

burned along with the fuel. High tem-

perature exhaust gases also burn the

oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve

stems.

The amount of engine oil consumed de-

pends on the viscosity of the oil, the

quality of the oil and the conditions the

vehicle is driven under.

More oil is consumed by high−speed driv-

ing and frequent acceleration and decel-

eration.

A new engine consumes more oil, since

its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls

have not become conditioned.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000

km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp.qt./600

miles)

When judging the amount of oil con-

sumption, note that the oil may become

diluted and make it difficult to judge

the true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used for

repeated short trips, and consumes a nor-

mal amount of oil, the dipstick may not

show any drop in the oil level at all, even

after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This

is because the oil is gradually becoming

diluted with fuel or moisture, making it

appear that the oil level has not changed.

The diluting ingredients evaporate out

when the vehicle is then driven at high

speeds, as on an expressway, making it

appear that oil is excessively consumed

after driving at high speeds.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVEL

CHECK

One of the most important points in prop-

er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-

gine oil at the optimum level so that oil

function will not be impaired. Therefore, it

is essential that the oil level be checked

regularly. Toyota recommends that the oil

level be checked every time you refuel

the vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularly

could lead to serious engine trouble

due to insufficient oil.

For detailed information on oil level check,

see “Checking the engine oil level” on

page 286.

210

30p103

Electric water pump Coolant heat storage

tank

Coolant flow control

valve

The coolant heat storage tank system

stores hot coolant and feeds it via the

electric water pump automatically to warm

the engine as required. This system helps

generate clean emissions. To confirm the

coolant heat storage system check, the

pump may operate automatically with the

vehicle stopped (in the “IG−OFF” mode).

Although the pump may operate and

cause noise while the vehicle is stopped,

this does not indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION

DThe coolant in this tank is hot even

if the engine and radiator are cold.

DFor replacement of the coolant,

contact your Toyota dealer.

DDo not touch bolts (9 pieces)

painted in yellow.

DIn case the bolts are loosened,

there is a risk of hot coolant com-

ing out from inside the tank.

DWhen this has any malfunction, the

surface of this tank gets hot. To

prevent burning yourself, do not

touch the tank.

INFORMATION

DIn such cases as the time of engine

starting and a short trip after the

engine is stopped, the electric water

pump will work for a moment, but

this is no problem.

DThis is for the preparation for good

emission.

Your engine is fitted with iridium−tipped

spark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs

and do not adjust gaps for your en-

gine performance and smooth drivabil-

ity.

Coolant heat storage system Iridium−tipped spark plugs

211

REGENERATIVE BRAKE

When the brake is applied, the electric

motor used as a generator converts kinet-

ic energy into electric energy.

The regenerative brake works in the fol-

lowing operations.

1. When the accelerator pedal is re-

leased, the reduced speed equal to en-

gine braking in a gasoline−fueled ve-

hicle is obtained in accordance with the

running mode position of the shift le-

ver.

2. When the brake pedal is depressed

with the shift lever in “D” or “B”, the

regenerative brake works.

HYDRAULIC BRAKE

This brake system has 3 independent hy-

draulic circuits. If either circuit should fail,

the other will still work. However, the ped-

al will be harder to press, and your stop-

ping distance will increase. Also, the

brake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only a

single brake system. Have your

brakes fixed immediately.

BRAKE ACTUATOR

The brake actuator uses brake fluid pres-

surized by the pump to power−assist the

brakes. If the brake actuator fails during

driving, the brake system warning light

comes on and buzzer sounds continuous-

ly. In this case, the brakes may not work

properly. If they do not work well, depress

the brake pedal firmly. If the brake system

warning light comes on, immediately stop

your vehicle and contact your Toyota deal-

er.

The yellow brake system warning light

may stay on for about 60 seconds after

the “IG−ON” mode is enabled. It is normal

if the light turns off after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the red brake system warning

light and buzzer. It is normal if the light

turns off and the buzzer stops sounding

after a few seconds.

You may hear a small sound in the engine

compartment after the hybrid system is

started or the brake pedal is depressed

repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating

sound of the brake system, and it is not

a malfunction.

In the following conditions, you may hear

a motor sound in the engine compartment.

DThe brake pedal is depressed when the

hybrid system is turned off.

DThe driver’s door is opened.

DFor a few seconds after the hybrid

system is “OFF” and about 90 seconds

have passed.

The brake pedal stroke may be short

when you press the “POWER” switch with

the brake pedal depressed.

Brake system

212

CAUTION

DDo not pump the brake pedal if the

hybrid system is not operating.

Each push on the pedal uses up

your reserved brake fluid pressure.

DEven if the power assist is com-

pletely lost, the brakes will still

work. But you will have to push the

pedal hard, much harder than nor-

mal. And your braking distance will

increase.

ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

The anti−lock brake system is designed

to automatically help prevent lock−up of

the wheels during a sudden braking or

braking on slippery road surfaces. This

assists in providing directional stability

and steering performance of the vehicle

under these circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brake

pedal: When the anti−lock brake system

function is in action, the slip indicator in

the instrument cluster flashes and you

will hear a noise. In this situation, to let

the anti−lock brake system work for you,

just hold the brake pedal down more

firmly. Do not pump the brake in a panic

stop. This will result in reduced braking

performance.

The anti−lock brake system becomes op-

erative after the vehicle has accelerated

to a speed in excess of approximately 10

km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the

vehicle decelerates to a speed below

approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery

road surfaces such as on a manhole cov-

er, a steel plate at a construction site,

joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day

tends to activate the anti−lock brake sys-

tem.

When the anti−lock brake system is ac-

tivated, the following condition may oc-

cur. They do not indicate a malfunction

of the system:

DYou may hear the anti−lock brake sys-

tem operating and the vibrations of the

vehicle body and steering wheel. You

may also hear the motor sound in the

engine compartment even after the ve-

hicle is stopped.

213

CAUTION

Do not overestimate the anti−lock

brake system: Although the anti−lock

brake system assists in providing ve-

hicle control, it is still important to

drive with all due care and maintain

a moderate speed and safe distance

from the vehicle in front of you, be-

cause there are limits to the vehicle

stability and effectiveness of steering

wheel operation even with the anti−

lock brake system on.

If tire grip performance exceeds its

capability, or if hydroplaning occurs

during high speed driving in the rain,

the anti−lock brake system does not

provide vehicle control.

Anti−lock brake system is not de-

signed to shorten the stopping dis-

tance: Always drive at a moderate

speed and maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front of you.

Compared with vehicles without an

anti−lock brake system, your vehicle

may require a longer stopping dis-

tance in the following cases:

DDriving on rough, gravel or snow−

covered roads.

DDriving with tire chains installed.

DDriving over the steps such as the

joints on the road.

DDriving on roads where the road

surface is pitted or has other differ-

ences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size at

appropriate pressure: The anti−lock

brake system detects vehicle speeds

using the speed sensors for respec-

tive wheels’ turning speeds. The use

of tires other than specified may fail

to detect the accurate turning speed,

resulting in a longer stopping dis-

tance.

30p002b

Vehicle sold in U.S.A.

30p007b

Vehicle sold in Canada

214

“ABS” warning light

The light comes on when the “IG−ON”

mode is enabled. If the anti−lock brake

system works properly, the light turns

off after the “READY” light comes on.

Thereafter, if the system malfunctions,

the light comes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

anti−lock brake system does not operate,

but the brake system still operates con-

ventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

anti−lock brake system does not operate

so that the wheels could lock up during

a sudden braking or braking on slippery

road surfaces.

If either of the following conditions oc-

curs, this indicates a malfunction some-

where in the components monitored by

the warning light system. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible to

service the vehicle.

DThe light does not come on when the

“IG−ON” mode is enabled, or the

“READY” light remains on.

DThe light comes on while you are driv-

ing.

A warning light turning on briefly during

operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains on

together with the red brake system

warning light, immediately stop your

vehicle at a safe place and contact

your Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lock

brake system will fail but also the

vehicle will become extremely unsta-

ble during braking.

Either of the following conditions may

occur, but does not indicate a malfunc-

tion:

DThe light may stay on for about 60

seconds after the “IG−ON” mode is en-

abled. It is normal if it turns off after

a while.

DDepressing the brake pedal repeatedly

may turn on the light. It is normal if

it turns off after a few seconds.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM

When you slam the brakes on, the

brake assist system judges as an emer-

gency stop and provides more powerful

braking for a driver who cannot hold

down the brake pedal firmly.

When you slam the brakes on, more pow-

erful braking will be applied. At this time,

you may hear a sound in the engine

compartment. This does not indicate a

malfunction.

The brake assist system becomes opera-

tive after the vehicle has accelerated to

a speed in excess of approximately 10

km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the

vehicle decelerates to a speed below

approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

For an explanation of this system’s warn-

ing light, see “Service reminder indicators

and warning buzzers” on page 117.

215

The electric power steering system, us-

ing an electric motor, assists the turn-

ing of the steering wheel.

In the following cases, you may feel the

steering becomes heavy. However, the

electric power steering system warning

light does not come on. (Because it is

not a malfunction.)

DWhen maneuvering the steering fre-

quently or keeping the steering wheel

turned fully while the vehicle is stopped

or moving very slowly

The power steering effect will be re-

duced to prevent the system from over-

heating. Avoid turning the steering

wheel, or stop the vehicle. When you

leave the vehicle in the “IG−ON” mode

for a while, the system will become

cool.

NOTICE

If you repeat the operation which will

turn on the overheating prevention

function, the electric power steering

system may be damaged.

DWhen the auxiliary battery is dis-

charged

Check the auxiliary battery’s condition.

If necessary, recharge or replace the

battery. For details, see “Checking aux-

iliary battery condition” on page 300.

DWhen the steering wheel is operated

with the hybrid system not to be turned

on (with the “READY” light off)

The auxiliary battery capacity is de-

creased temporarily. The system re-

turns to normal some time after the

hybrid system is turned on.

If there is a problem somewhere in the

electric power steering system, the warn-

ing light comes on in the multi−information

display. For details, see “Multi−information

display” on page 124.

30p003

The brake pad wear limit indicators on

your disc brakes give a warning noise

when the brake pads are worn to where

replacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noise

while driving, have the brake pads

checked and replaced by your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-

tor damage can result if the pads are not

replaced when necessary.

Electric power steering system Brake pad wear limit

indicators

216

30p004b

The vehicle identification number (VIN)

is the legal identifier for your vehicle.

This number is on the left top of the

instrument panel, and can be seen

through the windshield from outside.

This is the primary identification number

for your Toyota. It is used in registering

the ownership of your vehicle.

30p005b

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is

also on the Certification Label.

30p006b

Engine number

Motor number

The engine and motor number plates

are installed on the engine and trans-

axle case as shown.

Your Toyota’s identification—

—Vehicle identification

number —Engine and motor number

217

Theft prevention labels

Your new vehicle carries theft preven-

tion labels which are approximately 47

mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reduce

the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-

ing the tracing and recovery of parts from

stolen vehicles. The label is designed so

that once it is applied to a surface, any

attempt to remove it will result in destroy-

ing the integrity of the label. Transferring

these labels intact from one part to anoth-

er, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove the

theft prevention labels as it may vio-

late certain state or federal laws.

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassis

with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It

can cause dangerous handling charac-

teristics, resulting in loss of control.

Suspension and chassis

218

This illustration indicates typical tire

symbols.

1. Tire size—For details, see “Tire

size” on page 222.

2. DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)—For details, see

“DOT and Tire Identification Num-

ber (TIN)” on page 221.

3. Location of tread wear indica-

tors—For details, see “Checking

and replacing tires” on page 293.

4. Tire ply composition and materi-

als—Plies mean a layer of rubber−

coated parallel cords. Cords mean

the strands forming the plies in the

tire.

5. Summer tire or all season

tire—An all season tire has “M+S”

on the sidewall. A tire not marked

with “M+S” is a summer tire. For

details, see “Types of tires” on

page 231.

Tire information—

—Tire symbols (Standard tire)

30p101

219

6. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—A

radial tire has “RADIAL” on the

sidewall. The tire not marked with

“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

7. “TUBELESS” or “TUBE TYPE”

—A tubeless tire does not have a

tube inside the tire and air is direct-

ly filled in the tire. A tube type tire

has a tube inside the tire and the

tube maintains the air pressure.

8. Load limit at maximum cold tire

inflation pressure—For details,

see “Checking and replacing tires”

on page 293.

9. Maximum cold tire inflation

pressure—This means the pres-

sure to which a tire may be in-

flated. For recommended cold tire

inflation pressure, see “Tires” on

page 315.

10. Uniform tire quality grading—

For details, see “Uniform tire quali-

ty grading” that follows.

220

This illustration indicates typical tire

symbols.

1. “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”—A

compact spare tire is identified by

the phrase “TEMPORARY USE

ONLY” molded into its sidewall.

This tire is designed for temporary

emergency use only. For details,

see “Compact spare tire” on page

248.

2. Tire size—For details, see “Tire

size” on page 222.

3. DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)—For details, see

“DOT and Tire Identification Num-

ber (TIN)” on page 221.

4. Location of tread wear indica-

tors—For details, see “Checking

and replacing tires” on page 293.

5. Load limit at maximum cold tire

inflation pressure—For details,

see “Checking and replacing tires”

on page 293.

—Tire symbols

(Compact spare tire)

30p104a

221

6. Maximum cold tire inflation

pressure—This means the pres-

sure to which a tire may be in-

flated. For recommended cold tire

inflation pressure, see “Tires” on

page 315.

7. Tire ply composition and materi-

als—Plies mean a layer of rubber−

coated parallel cords. Cords mean

the strands forming the plies in the

tire.

8. “TUBELESS” or “TUBE TYPE”

—A tubeless tire does not have a

tube inside the tire and air is direct-

ly filled in the tire. A tube type tire

has a tube inside the tire and the

tube maintains the air pressure.

9. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—A

radial tire has “RADIAL” on the

sidewall. The tire not marked with

“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

21A009a

This illustration indicates typical DOT

and Tire Identification Number (TIN).

1. “DOT” symbol

2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)

3. Tire manufacturer’s identification

mark

4. Tire size code

5. Manufacturer’s optional tire type

code

6. Manufacturing week

7. Manufacturing year

The “DOT” symbol certifies that the

tire conforms to applicable Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

—DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)

222

30p102

This illustration indicates typical tire

size.

1. Tire use (P=Passenger car,

T=Temporary use)

2. Section width (in millimeters)

3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section

width)

4. Tire construction code (R=Radial,

D=Diagonal)

5. Wheel diameter (in inches)

6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)

7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one

letter)

21A007a

1. Section width

2. Tire height

3. Wheel diameter

21A006a

1. Bead

2. Sidewall

3. Shoulder

4. Tread

5. Belt

6. Inner liner

7. Reinforcing rubber

8. Carcass

9. Rim lines

10. Bead wires

11. Chafer

—Tire size —Name of each section of tire

223

—Uniform tire quality grading

This information has been prepared

in accordance with regulations issued

by the National Highway Traffic Safe-

ty Administration of the U.S. Depart-

ment of Transportation. It provides

the purchasers and/or prospective

purchasers of Toyota vehicles with in-

formation on uniform tire quality grad-

ing.

Your Toyota dealer will help answer

any questions you may have as you

read this information.

DOT quality grades—All passenger

car tires must conform to Federal

Safety Requirements in addition to

these grades. Quality grades can

be found where applicable on the

tire sidewall between tread shoul-

der and maximum section width.

For example: Treadwear 200 Trac-

tion AA Temperature A.

Tread wear—The tread wear grade

is a comparative rating based on the

wear rate of the tire when tested un-

der controlled conditions on a speci-

fied government test course. For ex-

ample, a tire graded 150 would wear

one and a half (1−1/2) times as well

on the government course as a tire

graded 100. The relative performance

of tires depends upon the actual

conditions of their use, however, and

may depart significantly from the

norm due to variations in driving hab-

its, service practices and differences

in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C—The traction

grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C, and they represent

the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-

ment as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government

test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor trac-

tion performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned

to this tire is based on braking

(straight ahead) traction tests and

does not include cornering (turning)

traction.

224

Temperature A, B, C—The tempera-

ture grades are A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire’s resis-

tance to the generation of heat and

its ability to dissipate heat when

tested under controlled conditions on

a specified indoor laboratory test

wheel. Sustained high temperature

can cause the material of the tire to

degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-

responds to a level of performance

which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B

and A represent higher levels of per-

formance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grades for

this tire are established for a tire that

is properly inflated and not over-

loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-

tion, or excessive loading, either sep-

arately or in combination, can cause

heat buildup and possible tire failure.

225

Tire related term Meaning

Cold tire inflation pressure tire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked at least 3 hours or

more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile under that condition

Maximum inflation pressure the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and shown

on the sidewall of the tire

Recommended inflation pressure cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Accessory weight

the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced)

of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, pow-

er seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as

factory−installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Curb weight

the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum

capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and addi-

tional weight optional engine

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

the sum of—

(a) curb weight;

(b) accessory weight;

(d) production options weight

Normal occupant weight 68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second column

of Table 1 that follows

—Glossary of tire terminology

226

Tire related term Meaning

Production options weight

the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over

2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not pre-

viously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty

brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim

Vehicle capacity weight

(Total load capacity)

the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s desig-

nated seating capacity

Intended outboard sidewall

(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears

manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper

than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular

side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Occupant distribution distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table

1 that follows

Rim a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads

are seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation rim diameter and width

Rim type designation the industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle maximum load on the tire the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle

its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two

227

Tire related term Meaning

Vehicle normal load on the tire

the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle

its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight

(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two

Weather side the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Table 1– Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity, number

of occupants

Vehicle normal load, number of occu-

pants

Occupant distribution in a normally

loaded vehicle

2 through 4 22 in front

5 through 10 32 in front, 1 in second seat

228

Vehicle load limits include total load

capacity, seating capacity, towing ca-

pacity and cargo capacity. Follow the

load limits shown below.

Total load capacity:

379 kg (835 lb.)

Total load capacity means combined

weight of occupants, cargo and lug-

gage.

Seating capacity:

Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)

Seating capacity means the maximum

number of occupants whose esti-

mated average weight is 68 kg (150

lb.) per person. Depending on the

weight of each person, the seating ca-

pacity given may exceed the total

load capacity.

NOTICE

Even if the number of occupants

are within the seating capacity,

do not exceed the total load ca-

pacity.

Towing capacity

Toyota does not recommend towing

a trailer with your vehicle. Your ve-

hicle is not designed for trailer towing.

Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or de-

crease depending on the size (weight)

and the number of occupants. For de-

tails, see “Capacity and distribution”

that follows.

CAUTION

Do not apply the load more than

each load limit. That may cause

not only damage to the tires, but

also deterioration to the steering

ability and braking ability, which

may cause an accident.

When stowing cargo and luggage in

the vehicle, observe the following:

DPut cargo and luggage in the lug-

gage compartment when at all

possible. Be sure all items are se-

cured in place.

DBe careful to keep the vehicle bal-

anced. Locating the weight as far

forward as possible helps maintain

balance.

DFor better fuel economy, do not

carry unneeded weight.

CAUTION

DTo prevent cargo and luggage

from sliding forward during

braking, do not stack anything

in the luggage compartment.

Keep cargo and luggage low,

as close to the floor as pos-

sible.

Vehicle load limits Cargo and luggage—

—Stowage precautions

229

DNever allow anyone to ride in

the luggage compartment. It is

not designed for passengers.

They should ride in their seats

with their seat belts properly

fastened. Otherwise, they are

much more likely to suffer seri-

ous bodily injury, in the event

of sudden braking or a colli-

sion.

DDo not place anything on the

luggage cover. Such items may

be thrown about and possibly

injure people in the vehicle

during sudden braking or an

accident. Secure all items in a

safe place.

DDo not drive with objects left

on top of the instrument panel.

They may interfere with the

driver’s field of view. Or they

may move during sharp vehicle

acceleration or turning, and im-

pair the driver’s control of the

vehicle. In an accident they

may injure the vehicle occu-

pants.

NOTICE

Do not load the vehicle beyond

the vehicle capacity weight giv-

en in Section 9.

Cargo capacity depends on the to-

tal weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-

ity) – (Total weight of occupants)

STEPS FOR DETERMINING COR-

RECT LOAD LIMIT

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and car-

go should never exceed XXX

pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will

be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

—Capacity and distribution

230

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and lug-

gage load capacity. For example,

if the “XXX” amount equals 1400

lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.

passengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400–750 (5x150)=650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo

and luggage load capacity calcu-

lated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-

er, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your ve-

hicle.

Toyota does not recommend towing

a trailer with your vehicle. Your ve-

hicle is not designed for trailer towing.

Total load

capacity

Cargo

capacity

EXAMPLE ON YOUR VEHICLE

In case that 2 people with the com-

bined weight of 166 kg (366 lb.) are

riding in your vehicle with the total

load capacity of 379 kg (835 lb.), the

available amount of cargo and lug-

gage load capacity will be as follows:

379 kg – 166 kg = 213 kg.

(835 lb. – 366 lb. = 469 lb.)

From this condition, if 3 more passen-

gers with the combined weight of 176

kg (388 lb.) get on, the available car-

go and luggage load will be reduced

as follows:

231

213 kg – 176 kg = 37 kg.

(469 lb. – 388 lb. = 81 lb.)

As shown in the above example, if the

number of occupants increases, the

cargo and luggage load equaling the

combined weight of occupants who

got on later must be reduced. In other

words, if the increase in the number

of occupants causes the excess of

the total load capacity (combined

weight of occupants plus cargo and

luggage load), you have to reduce the

cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

For details about total load capacity,

see “Vehicle load limits” on page 228.

CAUTION

Even if the total load of occu-

pant’s weight and the cargo load

is less than the total load capac-

ity, do not apply the load uneven-

ly. That may cause not only dam-

age to the tire but also deteriora-

tion to the steering ability due to

unbalance of the vehicle, causing

an accident.

Types of tires

Determine what kind of tires your

vehicle is originally equipped with.

1. All season tires

All season tires are designed to pro-

vide better traction in snow and to be

adequate for driving in most winter

conditions, as well as for use all year

round.

All season tires, however, do not have

adequate traction performance

compared with snow tires in heavy or

loose snow. Also, all season tires fall

short in acceleration and handling

performance compared with summer

tires in highway driving.

232

2. Summer tires

Summer tires are high−speed capabil-

ity tires best suited to highway driving

under dry conditions.

Since summer tires do not have the

same traction performance as snow

tires, summer tires are inadequate for

driving on snow−covered or icy roads.

For driving on snow−covered or icy

roads, we recommend using snow

tires. If installing snow tires, be sure

to replace all four tires.

The details about how to distinguish

summer tires from all season tires are

described on page 218.

CAUTION

DDo not mix summer and all sea-

son tires on your vehicle as

this can cause dangerous han-

dling characteristics, resulting

in loss of control.

DDo not use tire other than the

manufacturer’s designated

tires, and never mix tires or

wheels of the sizes different

from the originally equipped

tires and wheels.

233

STARTING AND DRIVING

Before starting the hybrid system 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to start the hybrid system 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tips for driving in various conditionss 236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Winter driving tips 237. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dinghy towing 238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trailer towing 239. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer, too 239. . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4

234

1. Check the area around the vehicle be-

fore entering it.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,

head restraint height and steering

wheel angle.

3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view

mirrors.

4. Lock all doors.

5. Fasten seat belts.

When you get in the vehicle, check

whether the “READY” light is on or

not.

CAUTION

Your vehicle does not produce any

noise or vibration when the vehicle is

ready to be driven with the “READY”

light on. Move your foot carefully

from the brake pedal to the accelera-

tion pedal when driving.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-

sories.

3. Depress the brake pedal and hold it

to the floor until driving off. 40p102a

Before starting the hybrid system, be sure

to follow the instructions in “(a) Before

starting the hybrid system”.

Normal starting procedure

Carry the key and press the “POWER”

switch briefly and firmly with the brake

pedal depressed. The “READY” light starts

blinking. After a few seconds, the blinking

“READY” light remains on and two beeps

sound. (If the ambient temperature is low,

such as during winter driving conditions,

it may take time until the “READY” light

is on.)

The engine may not start even with the

“READY” light on.

Before starting the hybrid

system

How to start the hybrid

system— (a) Before starting

the hybrid system

(b) Turning on the hybrid

system (Using the smart

function—on some models)

235

You may hear a motor sound in the en-

gine compartment when the brake pedal is

depressed with the hybrid system off.

When the hybrid system is started or

stopped, you may hear a sound coming

from the hybrid vehicle battery in the lug-

gage compartment. However, this does not

indicate any trouble.

If there is a problem somewhere in the

hybrid system, the hybrid system malfunc-

tion warning light will come on in place of

the “READY” light. If this happens, contact

your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Never start the hybrid system from

outside the vehicle, or an accident

may occur. Be sure to sit on the driv-

er seat, then start the system when

driving.

NOTICE

zThe hybrid system cannot be

started when the shift position is

“N”. Be sure to put it in “P” and

then start the system.

zIf any warning light comes on (See

page 117 for details.) or the auxilia-

ry battery is disconnected, the hy-

brid system may not start by push-

ing the “POWER” switch. In that

case, push it once again. If the

“READY” light does not come on,

contact your Toyota dealer.

zWhen you start the hybrid system

at a lowered outside temperature, it

may take longer before the blinking

“READY” light changes to stay on.

40p002c

Before starting the hybrid system, be sure

to follow the instructions in “(a) Before

starting the hybrid system”.

Normal starting procedure

Insert the key and press the “POWER”

switch briefly and firmly with the brake

pedal depressed. The “READY” light starts

blinking. After a few seconds, the blinking

“READY” light remains on and two beeps

sound. (If the ambient temperature is low,

such as during winter driving conditions,

it may take time until the “READY” light

is on.)

The engine may not start even with the

“READY” light on.

(b) Turning on the hybrid

system (Using the key)

236

You may hear a motor sound in the en-

gine compartment when the brake pedal is

depressed with the hybrid system off.

When the hybrid system is started or

stopped, you may hear a sound coming

from the hybrid vehicle battery in the lug-

gage compartment. However, this does not

indicate any trouble.

If there is a problem somewhere in the

hybrid system, the hybrid system malfunc-

tion warning light will come on in place of

the “READY” light. If this happens, contact

your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Never start the hybrid system from

outside the vehicle, or an accident

may occur. Be sure to sit on the driv-

er seat, then start the system when

driving.

NOTICE

zThe hybrid system cannot be

started when the shift position is

“N”. Be sure to put it in “P” and

then start the system.

zIf any warning light comes on (See

page 117 for details.) or the auxilia-

ry battery is disconnected, the hy-

brid system may not start by push-

ing the “POWER” switch. In that

case, push it once again. If the

“READY” light does not come on,

contact your Toyota dealer.

zWhen you start the hybrid system

at a lowered outside temperature, it

may take longer before the blinking

“READY” light changes to stay on.

DAlways slow down in gusty crosswinds.

This will allow you much better control.

DDrive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-

sible, at a right angle. Avoid driving

onto high, sharp−edged objects and

other road hazards. Failure to do so

can lead to severe tire damage such

as a tire burst.

Drive slowly when passing over bumps

or travelling on a bumpy road. Other-

wise, the impact could cause severe

damage to the tires and/or wheels.

DWhen parking on a hill, turn the front

wheels until they touch the curb so

that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the

parking brake, and put the hybrid

transaxle “P”. If necessary, block the

wheels.

DWashing your vehicle or driving through

deep water may get the brakes wet. To

see whether they are wet, check that

there is no traffic near you, and then

press the pedal lightly. If you do not

feel a normal braking force, the brakes

are probably wet. To dry them, drive

the vehicle cautiously while lightly

pressing the brake pedal with the park-

ing brake applied. If they still do not

work safely, pull to the side of the road

and call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

Tips for driving in various

conditions

237

CAUTION

DBefore driving off, make sure the

parking brake is fully released and

the parking brake reminder light is

off.

DDo not leave your vehicle unat-

tended with the “READY” light on.

DDo not rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving. It can cause

dangerous overheating, needless

wear, and poor fuel economy.

DTo drive down a long or steep hill,

reduce your speed and downshift.

Remember, if you ride the brakes

excessively, they may overheat and

not work properly.

DBe careful when accelerating or

braking on a slippery surface. Sud-

den acceleration or engine braking,

could cause the vehicle to skid or

spin.

DDo not drive in excess of the speed

limit. Even if the legal speed limit

permits it, do not drive over 140

km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle

has high−speed capability tires.

Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph)

may result in tire failure, loss of

control and possible injury. Be sure

to consult a tire dealer to determine

whether the tires on your vehicle

are high−speed capability tires or

not before driving at such speeds.

DDo not continue normal driving

when the brakes are wet. If they are

wet, your vehicle will require a lon-

ger stopping distance, and it may

pull to one side when the brakes

are applied. Also, the parking brake

will not hold the vehicle securely.

Make sure you have a proper freeze

protection for engine coolant.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

or similar high quality ethylene glycol

based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,

and non−borate coolant with long−life

hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant

with long−life hybrid organic acid

technology is a combination of low

phosphates and organic acids.)

See “Checking the coolant level” on page

288 for details of coolant type selection.

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and

50% deionized water. This coolant pro-

vides protection down to about −35_C

(−31_F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and

45% deionized water. This coolant pro-

vides protection down to about −42_C

(−44_F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

Winter driving tips

238

Check the condition of the auxiliary

battery and cables.

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of

any auxiliary battery, so it must be in top

shape to provide enough power for winter

starting. Section 8−3 tells you how to

visually inspect the auxiliary battery. Your

Toyota dealer will be pleased to check the

level of charge.

Make sure the engine oil viscosity is

suitable for the cold weather.

See page 287 for recommended viscosity.

Leaving a heavy summer oil in your ve-

hicle during winter months may cause

harder starting. If you are not sure about

which oil to use, call your Toyota deal-

er—they will be pleased to help.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into the

locks to keep them from freezing.

Use a washer fluid containing an anti−

freeze solution.

This product is available at your Toyota

dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow

the manufacturer’s directions for how

much to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or any

other substitute because it may dam-

age your vehicle’s paint.

Do not use your parking brake when

there is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, push the “P” position

switch and block the rear wheels. Do not

use the parking brake, for snow or water

accumulated in and around the parking

brake mechanism may freeze, making it

hard to release.

Keep ice and snow from accumulating

under the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenders

can make steering difficult. During extreme

winter driving, stop and check under the

fenders occasionally.

Depending on where you are driving,

we recommend you carry some emer-

gency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in the

vehicle are tire chains, window scraper,

bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,

jumper cables, etc.

40p050b

Your vehicle is not designed to be

dinghy towed (with four wheels on the

ground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle with four

wheels on the ground. This may

cause serious damage to your ve-

hicle.

Dinghy towing

239

40p003b

Toyota does not recommend towing a

trailer with your Toyota. It is not de-

signed for trailer towing.

Improving fuel economy is easy−just take

it easy. It will help make your vehicle last

longer, too. Here are some specific tips

on how to save money on both fuel and

repairs:

DKeep your tires inflated at the cor-

rect pressure. Underinflation causes

tire wear and wastes fuel. See page

291 for instructions.

DDo not carry unneeded weight in

your vehicle. Excess weight puts a

heavier load on the engine, causing

greater fuel consumption.

DAccelerate slowly and smoothly.

Avoid jackrabbit starts.

DAvoid continuous speeding up and

slowing down. Stop−and−go driving

wastes power.

DAvoid unnecessary stopping and

braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try

to time the traffic signals so you only

need to stop as little as possible or

take advantage of through streets to

avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis-

tance from other vehicles to avoid sud-

den braking. This will also reduce wear

on your brakes.

DAvoid heavy traffic or traffic jams

whenever possible.

DDo not rest your foot on brake ped-

al. This causes premature wear, over-

heating and poor fuel economy.

DMaintain a moderate speed on high-

ways. The faster you drive, the greater

the fuel consumption. By reducing your

speed, you will cut down on fuel con-

sumption.

DKeep the front wheels in proper

alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and

slow down on rough roads. Improper

alignment not only causes faster tire

wear but also puts an extra load on

the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

DKeep the bottom of your vehicle free

from mud, etc. This not only lessens

weight but also helps prevent corro-

sion.

DKeep your vehicle tuned−up and in

top shape. A dirty air cleaner, improp-

er valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil

and grease, brakes not adjusted, etc.

all lower engine performance and con-

tribute to poor fuel economy. For longer

life of all parts and lower operating

costs, keep all maintenance work on

schedule, and if you often drive under

severe conditions, see that your ve-

hicle receives more frequent mainte-

nance.

Trailer towing How to save fuel and make

your vehicle last longer, too

240

CAUTION

Never turn off the hybrid system to

coast down hills. Your power steering

and brake booster will not function

without the hybrid system running.

Also, the emission control system op-

erates properly only when the hybrid

system is running.

241

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

If your vehicle will not start 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your hybrid system stalls while driving 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle overheatss 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you have a flat tire 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle needs to be towed 258. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you lose your keys 261. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you cannot operate back door opener 262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5

242

Before making these checks, make sure

you have followed the correct starting

procedure given in “How to start the

hybrid system” on page 234 and that you

have sufficient fuel. Also check whether

the other keys will start the hybrid

system. If they work, your key may be

broken. Have the key checked at your

Toyota dealer. If none of your keys work,

there may be a malfunction in the hybrid

vehicle immobilizer system. Call your

Toyota dealer. (See “Keys” on page 20.)

If the instrument cluster dims or the

instrument cluster display turns off

with the hybrid system on—

1. Check that the auxiliary battery termi-

nals are tight and clean.

2. If the auxiliary battery terminals are

O.K., the auxiliary battery is dis-

charged. You may try jump starting.

See “(b) Jump starting” for further in-

structions.

NOTICE

Hybrid vehicles cannot be push−

started.

If the instrument cluster is shown in

appropriate brightness with the hybrid

system is in the “IG−ON” mode—

The hybrid vehicle system is suspected to

be faulty. Contact your Toyota dealer.

If the auxiliary battery is discharged,

the hybrid system can be started by

jump starting. Depending on the vehicle

condition, the engine may not start.

To avoid serious personal injury and

damage to your vehicle which might re-

sult from battery explosion, acid burns,

electrical burns, or damaged electronic

components, these instructions must be

followed precisely.

If the auxiliary battery is discharged, you

cannot access to the auxiliary battery in

the luggage compartment because the

back door cannot be opened. Use the ex-

clusive jump starting terminal in the en-

gine compartment. For details, see “JUMP

STARTING PROCEDURE” on page 243.

NOTICE

If the auxiliary battery is discharged

with the transaxle in “P”, your vehicle

cannot be moved unless the front

wheels are raised. This is because the

front wheels are locked by means of

the parking lock mechanism.

If you are unsure about how to follow this

procedure, we strongly recommend that

you seek the help of a competent qualified

technician or towing service.

If your vehicle will not start—

(a) Simple checks (b) Jump starting

243

CAUTION

DBooster battery contains sulfuric

acid which is poisonous and corro-

sive. Wear protective safety glasses

when jump starting, and avoid spil-

ling acid on your skin, clothing, or

vehicle.

DIf you should accidentally get acid

on yourself or in your eyes, remove

any contaminated clothing and flush

the affected area with water imme-

diately. Then get immediate medical

attention. If possible, continue to

apply water with a sponge or cloth

while en route to the medical office.

DThe gas normally produced by a

battery will explode if a flame or

spark is brought near. Use only

standardized jumper cables and do

not smoke or light a match while

jump starting.

NOTICE

zThe battery used for boosting must

be 12 V. Do not jump start unless

you are sure that the booster bat-

tery is correct.

zAfter jump starting procedure, the

hybrid system may not start by

pushing the “POWER” switch. In

that case, push it once again. If the

“READY” light does not come on,

contact your Toyota dealer.

50p049

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. Apply the parking brake and turn off

the headlight switch and interior light.

2. Turn off the hybrid system and remove

the key if inserted.

3. Open the hood and fuse block cover

shown in the above illustration.

244

Exclusive jump starting

terminal cover

4. Open the exclusive jump starting termi-

nal cover.

5. If the booster battery is installed in

another vehicle, make sure the ve-

hicles are not touching. Turn off all

unnecessary lights and accessories.

When boosting, use the battery of

matching or higher quality. Any other

battery may be difficult to jump start

with. If jump starting is difficult, charge

the battery for several minutes.

6. If required, remove all the vent plugs

from the booster batteries. Lay a cloth

over the open vents on the batteries.

(This helps reduce the explosion haz-

ard, personal injuries and burns.)

7. If the engine in the vehicle with the

booster battery is not running, start it

and let it run for a few minutes. During

jump starting, run the engine at about

2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal

lightly depressed. 50p044c

Booster

battery

Exclusive jump

starting terminal

Jumper

cable

Positive

terminal

(“+” mark)

8. Connect the jumper cables in the order

a, b, c, d.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive

(red) jumper cable to the exclusive

jump starting terminal.

b. Connect the clamp at the other end

of the positive (red) jumper cable to

the positive (+) terminal on the

booster battery.

245

50p045c

Booster

battery

Negative

terminal

(“–” mark)

Jumper

cable

c. Connect the clamp of the negative

(black) jumper cable to the negative

(–) terminal on the booster battery.

d. Connect the clamp at the other end

of the negative (black) jumper cable

to a solid, stationary, unpainted, me-

tallic point of the vehicle with the

discharged battery.

The recommended connecting point is

shown in the following illustration:

50p080a

Connecting point

CAUTION

When making the connections, to

avoid serious injury, do not lean over

the battery or accidentally let the

jumper cables or clamps touch any-

thing except the correct battery termi-

nals or the ground.

9. Charge the discharged battery with the

jumper cables connected for approxi-

mately 5 minutes. At this time, run the

engine in the vehicle with the booster

battery at about 2000 rpm with the ac-

celerator pedal lightly depressed.

10. Start the hybrid system. Make sure the

“READY” light is on. If the hybrid ve-

hicle battery warning light comes on in

the multi−information display, the hybrid

vehicle battery is also discharged. Con-

tact your Toyota dealer.

11. Carefully disconnect the cables in the

exact reverse order: the negative cable

and then the positive cable.

12. Carefully dispose of the battery cover

cloths—they may now contain sulfuric

acid.

13. If removed, replace all the battery vent

plugs.

If the cause of your auxiliary battery dis-

charging is not apparent (for example,

lights left on), you should have it checked

at your Toyota dealer.

If the first start attempt is not success-

ful...

Check that the clamp on the jumper

cables are tight. Recharge the discharged

battery with the jumper cables connected

for several minutes and restart your hybrid

system in the normal way.

If the another attempt is not successful,

the battery may be depleted. Have it

checked at your Toyota dealer.

246

If your hybrid system stalls while driving...

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping

a straight line. Move cautiously off the

road to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Try starting the hybrid system again.

If the hybrid system will not start, see “If

your vehicle will not start” on page 242.

CAUTION

If the hybrid system is not operating,

the power assist for the brakes and

steering will not work so steering and

braking will be much harder than usu-

al.

If your high coolant temperature warn-

ing light comes on, if you experience a

loss of power, or if you hear a loud

knocking or pinging noise, the hybrid

system has probably overheated. You

should follow this procedure...

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-

hicle and turn on your emergency

flashers. Push the “P” position switch

and apply the parking brake. Turn off

the air conditioning if it is being used.

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the

radiator or reservoir, stop the hybrid

system. Wait until the steam subsides

before opening the hood. If there is no

coolant boiling over or steam, leave the

hybrid system running and make sure

the electric cooling fan is operating. If

it is not, turn the hybrid system off.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keep

the hood closed until there is no

steam. Escaping steam or coolant is

a sign of very high pressure.

3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from the

radiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.

However, note that water draining from

the air conditioning is normal if it has

been used.

CAUTION

When the hybrid system is running,

keep hands and clothing away from

the moving fan and engine drive

belts.

4. If the coolant is leaking, stop the hy-

brid system immediately. Call a Toyota

dealer for assistance.

5. If there are no obvious leaks, check

the coolant reservoir. If it is dry, add

coolant to the reservoir while the hy-

brid system is running. Fill it about half

full.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove the radiator

cap when the hybrid system and ra-

diator are hot. Serious injury could

result from scalding hot fluid and

steam blown out under pressure.

If your hybrid system stalls

while driving If your vehicle overheats

247

6. After the coolant temperature has

cooled to normal, again check the cool-

ant level in the reservoir. If necessary,

bring it up to half full again. Serious

coolant loss indicates a leak in the

system. You should have it checked as

soon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

1. Reduce your speed gradually,

keeping a straight line. Move cau-

tiously off the road to a safe place

well away from the traffic. Avoid

stopping on the center divider of

a highway. Park on a level spot

with firm ground.

2. Stop the hybrid system and turn

on your emergency flashers.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.

4. Have everyone get out of the ve-

hicle on the side away from traffic.

5. Read the following instructions

thoroughly.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe

the following to reduce the possi-

bility of personal injury:

DFollow jacking instructions.

DDo not put any part of your

body under a vehicle sup-

ported by a jack. Personal inju-

ry may occur.

DDo not start or run the hybrid

system while your vehicle is

supported by the jack.

DStop the vehicle at a level firm

ground, firmly set the parking

brake. Block the wheel diago-

nally opposite to the one being

changed if necessary.

If you have a flat tire—

248

DMake sure to set the jack prop-

erly in the jack point. Raising

the vehicle with jack improper-

ly positioned will damage the

vehicle or may allow the ve-

hicle to fall off the jack and

cause personal injury.

DNever get under the vehicle

when the vehicle is supported

by the jack alone.

DUse the jack only for lifting

your vehicle during wheel

changing.

DDo not raise the vehicle with

someone in the vehicle.

DWhen raising the vehicle, do

not place any objects on top

of or underneath the jack.

DRaise the vehicle only high

enough to remove and change

the tire.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving with a

deflated tire. Driving even a

short distance can damage a

tire and wheel beyond repair. 50p007a

Compact spare tire

The compact spare tire is designed

for temporary emergency use only.

The compact spare tire is identified

by the distinctive wording “TEM-

PORARY USE ONLY” molded into the

side wall of the tire.

The compact spare tire saves space

in your luggage compartment, and its

lighter weight helps to improve fuel

economy and permits easier installa-

tion in case of a flat tire.

249

The compact spare tire can be used

many times, if necessary. It has tread

life of up to 4800 km (3000 miles) de-

pending on road conditions and your

driving habits. When tread wear indi-

cators appear on the tire, replace the

tire.

See also the tire information on page

293 for details on the tread wear indi-

cators and other service information.

CAUTION

DThe compact spare tire was de-

signed especially for your To-

yota. Do not use it on any other

vehicle.

DDo not use more than one com-

pact spare tire at the same

time.

DDo not exceed 80 km/h (50

mph) when driving with the

compact spare tire.

DReplace the compact spare tire

with the standard tire as soon

as possible.

DAvoid sudden acceleration,

sudden deceleration and sharp

turns with the compact spare

tire.

NOTICE

Your ground clearance is re-

duced when the compact spare

tire is installed so avoid driving

over obstacles and drive slowly

on rough, unpaved roads and

speed bumps. Also, do not at-

tempt to go through an auto-

matic car wash as the vehicle

may get caught, resulting in

damage.

250

50p008c

1. Get the required tools and spare

tire.

1 Wheel nut wrench

2 Jack handle

3Jack

4 Spare tire

To open the luggage storage box, see

“Luggage storage box” on page 199.

To prepare yourself for an emergency,

you should familiarize yourself with

the use of the jack, each of the tools

and their storage locations.

50p009a

To remove the jack, unlock the tight-

ening strap.

To store the jack, make sure it is se-

curely held by the tightening strap.

50p010e

To remove the spare tire:

1. Remove the luggage storage box.

2. Loosen the bolt and remove it.

3. Remove the jack box.

Then take the spare tire out of the

vehicle.

When storing the spare tire, put it in

place with the inner side of the wheel

facing up. Then secure the tire by re-

peating the above removal steps in

reverse order to prevent it from flying

forward during a collision or sudden

braking.

—Required tools and spare

tire

251

When installing the jack box, align the

arrows on the jack box with the ones

on the body.

50p011b

2. Block the wheel diagonally op-

posite the flat tire to keep the

vehicle from rolling when it is

jacked up.

When chocking the wheel, place a

wheel block in front of one of the front

wheels or behind one of the rear

wheels.

50p013d

3. Loosen all the wheel nuts.

Always loosen the wheel nuts before

raising the vehicle.

Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise

to loosen them. To get maximum le-

verage, fit the wrench to the nut so

that the handle is on the right side,

as shown above. Grab the wrench

near the end of the handle and pull

up on the handle. Be careful that the

wrench does not slip off the nut.

Do not remove the nuts yet—just un-

screw them about one−half turn.

—Blocking the wheel —Loosening wheel nuts

252

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the

bolts or nuts. The nuts may loos-

en and the wheels may fall off,

which could cause a serious ac-

cident. 50p014e

4. Position the jack at the jack

points as shown.

Make sure the jack is positioned on

a level and solid place.

50p015c

5. After making sure no one is in

the vehicle, raise it high enough

so that the spare tire can be

installed.

Remember you will need more ground

clearance when putting on the spare

tire than when removing the flat tire.

To raise the vehicle, insert the jack

handle into the jack (it is a loose fit)

and turn it clockwise. As the jack

touches the vehicle and begins to lift,

double−check that it is properly posi-

tioned.

—Positioning the jack —Raising your vehicle

253

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle when

the vehicle is supported by the

jack alone. 50p016a

6. Remove the wheel nuts and

change tires.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put it

aside.

Roll the spare wheel into position and

align the holes in the wheel with the

bolts. Then lift up the wheel and get

at least the top bolt started through

its hole. Wiggle the tire and press it

back over the other bolts.

50p017c

Before putting on wheels, remove any

corrosion on the mounting surfaces

with a wire brush or such. Installation

of wheels without good metal−to−met-

al contact at the mounting surface can

cause wheel nuts to loosen and even-

tually cause a wheel to come off while

driving.

—Changing wheels

254

50p018c

7. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fin-

ger tight.

Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end

inward) and tighten them as much as

you can by hand. Press back on the

tire and see if you can tighten them

more.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the

bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead

to overtightening the nuts and

damaging the bolts. The nuts

may loosen and the wheels may

fall off, which could cause a seri-

ous accident. If there is oil or

grease on any bolt or nut, clean

it.

50p019c

8. Lower the vehicle completely

and tighten the wheel nuts.

Turn the jack handle counterclock-

wise to lower the vehicle.

Use only the wheel nut wrench to

tighten the nuts. Do not use other

tools or any additional leverage other

than your hands, such as a hammer,

pipe or your foot. Make sure the

wrench is securely engaged over the

nut.

Tighten each nut a little at a time in

the order shown. Repeat the process

until all the nuts are tight.

—Reinstalling wheel nuts —Lowering your vehicle

255

CAUTION

DWhen lowering the vehicle,

make sure all portions of your

body and all other persons

around will not be injured as

the vehicle is lowered to the

ground.

DHave the wheel nuts tightened

with torque wrench to 103 N·m

(10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf), as soon

as possible after changing

wheels. Otherwise, the nuts

may loosen and the wheels

may fall off, which could cause

a serious accident.

9. Restow all the tools and jack se-

curely. Then secure the flat tire

in the luggage compartment

with the tire tie−down belts and

tie−down hooks as follows

CAUTION

Before driving, make sure all the

tools and jack are securely in

place in their storage location to

reduce the possibility of person-

al injury during a collision or

sudden braking. 1. Before stowing the flat tire, remove

the center wheel ornament by

pushing from the reverse side.

Be careful not to lose the wheel orna-

ment.

—Stowing flat tire

256

2. Put the flat tire on the center of

the luggage storage box lid with

the outer side of the wheel facing

up. Hook one ends of the belts to

the front tie−down hooks.

3. Pass the belts through the center

hole of the wheel as shown above.

4. Attach the other ends of the belts

to the rear tie−down hooks.

After stowing the flat tire, check that

the tire and belts are secured.

257

CAUTION

DMake sure the rear seats are in

their original position.

DWhen carrying the flat tire, se-

cure it using a tire tie−down

belts. Otherwise, the flat tire

may fly out in case of the sud-

den braking or an accident, re-

sulting in death or serious inju-

ry.

10. Check the air pressure of the re-

placed tire.

Adjust the air pressure to the specifi-

cation designated on page 315. If the

pressure is lower than specified, drive

slowly to the nearest Toyota dealer

and fill to the correct pressure.

Do not forget to reinstall the tire infla-

tion valve cap as dirt and moisture

could get into the valve core and pos-

sibly cause air leakage. If the cap is

missing, have a new one put on as

soon as possible.

As soon as possible after changing

wheels, tighten the wheel nuts to the

torque specified on page 315 with a

torque wrench. Have a technician re-

pair the flat tire.

After repairing the flat tire, change it

with compact spare tire and reinstall

the wheel ornament.

CAUTION

Take due care in handling the or-

nament to avoid unexpected per-

sonal injury.

—After changing wheels

258

50p021a

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

If towing is necessary, we recommend

you to have it done by your Toyota

dealer or a commercial tow truck ser-

vice. In consultation with them, have

your vehicle towed using either (a) or

(b).

Only when you cannot receive a towing

service from a Toyota dealer or com-

mercial tow truck service, tow your ve-

hicle carefully in accordance with the

instructions given in “—Emergency tow-

ing” on page 259.

Proper equipment will help ensure that

your vehicle is not damaged while being

towed. Commercial operators are generally

aware of the state/provincial and local

laws pertaining to towing.

Your vehicle can be damaged if it is

towed incorrectly. Although most operators

know the correct procedure, it is possible

to make a mistake. To avoid damage to

your vehicle, make sure the following pre-

cautions are observed. If necessary, show

this page to the tow truck driver.

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Use a safety chain system for all towing,

and abide by the state/provincial and local

laws. The wheels and axle on the ground

must be in good condition. If they are

damaged, use a towing dolly.

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front—Release the parking brake.

NOTICE

When lifting wheels, take care to en-

sure adequate ground clearance for

towing at the opposite end of the

raised vehicle. Otherwise, the under-

body of the towed vehicle will be

damaged during towing.

From rear—Use a towing dolly under the

front wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle from the rear

with the front wheels on the ground,

as this may cause serious damage to

the transmission.

(b) Using flat bed truck

If your vehicle needs to be

towed—

259

50p022b

NOTICE

Do not tow with sling type truck, ei-

ther from the front or rear. This may

cause body damage.

50p035b

If towing is necessary, we recommend

you to have it done by your Toyota

dealer or a commercial tow truck ser-

vice.

If towing service is not available in an

emergency, your vehicle may be tempo-

rarily towed by a cable or chain se-

cured to emergency towing eyelet in-

side of front bumper. Use extreme

caution when towing vehicles.

NOTICE

zOnly use specified towing eyelet;

otherwise your vehicle may be dam-

aged.

zNever tow a vehicle from the rear

with four wheels on the ground.

This may cause serious damage to

the transaxle.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer

it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only

on hard−surfaced roads for a short dis-

tance and at low speeds. Also, the

wheels, axles, drive train, steering and

brakes must all be in good condition.

—Emergency towing

260

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing ve-

hicles. Avoid sudden starts or erratic

driving maneuvers which would place

excessive stress on the emergency

towing eyelet and towing cable or

chain. The eyelet and towing cable or

chain may break and cause serious

injury or damage.

NOTICE

Use only a cable or chain specifically

intended for use in towing vehicles.

Securely fasten the cable or chain to

the towing eyelet provided.

Before towing, release the parking brake

and put the hybrid transaxle in “N”. The

hybrid system must be in the “IG−ON”

mode.

In the following cases, as the front wheels

might be locked by means of the parking

lock mechanism, your vehicle cannot be

towed by another vehicle using a rope.

Have your vehicle carried with the front

wheels or all the wheels raised.

DIf the parking mechanism fails.

DIf the auxiliary battery is discharged.

CAUTION

If the hybrid system is not running,

the power assist for the brakes and

steering will not work so steering and

braking will be much harder than usu-

al.

50p046a

1. Remove the towing eyelet as shown in

the illustration.

—Installing towing eyelet

261

50p047a

2. Secure the towing eyelet to the hole on

the bumper by turning it clockwise.

50p048a

3. Tighten the towing eyelet securely by

a wheel nut wrench.

CAUTION

When installing the eyelet on the ve-

hicle, be sure to tighten the eyelet

securely. If the eyelet is loose, it may

come off when being towed and re-

sult in death or serious injury.

You can purchase a new key at your

Toyota dealer if you can give them the

key number and master key.

Even if you lose only one key, contact

your Toyota dealer to make a new key. If

you lose all your master keys, you cannot

make new keys; the whole hybrid vehicle

immobilizer system must be replaced.

See the suggestion given in “Keys” on

page 20.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle and

you cannot get a duplicate, many Toyota

dealers can still open the door for you,

using their special tools. If you must

break a window to get in, we suggest

breaking the smallest side window be-

cause it is the least expensive to replace.

Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from

the glass.

If you lose your keys

262

50p053a

If the back door opener does not oper-

ate, you can open the back door from

the inside.

To open the back door from inside, per-

form the following procedure.

1. Open the luggage storage box (See

“Luggage storage box” on page 199.)

and remove the cover.

50p054a

2. Pull the lever with the back door mo-

tor, open the back door.

Be sure to have the back door opener

checked/repaired by your Toyota dealer.

If you cannot operate back

door opener

263

CORROSION PREVENTION AND

APPEARANCE CARE

Protecting your Toyota from corrosion 264. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Washing and waxing your Toyota 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cleaning the interiorr 267. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 6

264

Toyota, through the diligent research, de-

sign and use of the most advanced

technology available, helps prevent corro-

sion and provides you with the finest qual-

ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up to

you. Proper care of your Toyota can help

ensure long−term corrosion prevention.

The most common causes of corrosion

to your vehicle are:

DThe accumulation of road salt, dirt and

moisture in hard−to−reach areas under

the vehicle.

DChipping of paint, or undercoating

caused by minor accidents or by

stones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you live

in particular areas or operate your ve-

hicle under certain environmental condi-

tions:

DRoad salt or dust control chemicals will

accelerate corrosion, as will the pres-

ence of salt in the air near the sea−

coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

DHigh humidity accelerates corrosion es-

pecially when temperatures range just

above the freezing point.

DWetness or dampness to certain parts

of your vehicle for an extended period

of time, may cause corrosion even

though other parts of the vehicle may

be dry.

DHigh ambient temperatures can cause

corrosion to those components of the

vehicle which do not dry quickly due to

lack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keep

your vehicle, particularly the underside, as

clean as possible and to repair any dam-

age to paint or protective coatings as

soon as possible.

To help prevent corrosion on your

Toyota, follow these guidelines:

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, of

course, necessary to keep your vehicle

clean by regular washing, but to prevent

corrosion, the following points should be

observed:

DIf you drive on salted roads in the

winter or if you live near the ocean,

you should hose off the undercarriage

at least once a month to minimize cor-

rosion.

DPay particular attention to the vehicle’s

underside and wheel housings as it is

difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It

will do more harm than good to simply

wet the mud and debris without remov-

ing. The lower edge of doors, rocker

panels and frame members have drain

holes which should not be allowed to

clog with dirt as trapped water in these

areas can cause corrosion.

DWash the underside of the vehicle thor-

oughly when winter is over.

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” for

more tips.

Check the condition of your vehicle’s

paint and trim. If you find any chips or

scratches in the paint, touch them up im-

mediately to prevent corrosion from start-

ing. If the chips or scratches have gone

through the bare metal, have a qualified

body shop make the repair.

Protecting your Toyota from

corrosion

265

Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa-

ter and dirt can accumulate under the

floor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc-

casionally check under the mats to make

sure the area is dry. Be particularly care-

ful when transporting chemicals, cleans-

ers, fertilizers, salt, etc.; these should be

transported in proper containers. If a spill

or leak should occur, immediately clean

and dry the area.

Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated

garage or a roofed place. Do not park

your vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-

lated garage. If you wash your vehicle in

the garage, or if you drive it covered with

water or snow, your garage may be so

damp and it will cause corrosion. Even if

your garage is heated, a wet vehicle can

corrode if the ventilation is poor.

Your Toyota is a hybrid vehicle. Pay

particular attention when washing your

To y ot a .

NOTICE

Before washing your Toyota, be sure

to observe the following in order to

avoid the risk of damage to your ve-

hicle.

zDo not splash water on the electric

components in the engine compart-

ment. This may cause the malfunc-

tion of the electric components.

Washing your Toyota

Keep your vehicle clean by regular

washing.

The following cases may cause weakness

to the paint or corrosion to the body and

parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-

sible.

DWhen driving in a coastal area

DWhen driving on a road sprinkled with

antifreeze

DWhen having coal tar, tree sap, bird

droppings and carcass of an insect

DWhen driving in the areas where there

is a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust

and chemical substances

DWhen the vehicle becomes remarkably

dirty with dust and mud

Hand−washing your Toyota

Work in the shade and wait until the

vehicle body is not hot to the touch.

CAUTION

When cleaning under floor or chassis,

be careful not to injure your hands.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-

move any mud or road salt from the

underside of the vehicle or in the

wheel wells.

Washing and waxing your

Toyota

266

2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,

mixed according to the manufacturer’s

instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and

keep it wet by dipping it frequently into

the wash water. Do not rub hard—let

the soap and water remove the dirt.

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic

wheel ornaments are damaged easily by

organic substances. If any organic sub-

stances splashes an ornament, be sure to

wash it off with water and check if the

ornament is damaged.

CAUTION

Do not attach the heavily damaged

plastic wheel ornament. It may fly off

the wheel and cause accidents while

the vehicle is moving.

Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap

or neutral detergent.

Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do not

scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper

faces are soft.

Road tar: Remove with turpentine or

cleaners that are marked safe for painted

surfaces.

NOTICE

Do not use organic substances (gaso-

line kerosene, benzine or strong sol-

vents) which may be toxic or cause

damage.

3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap can

cause streaking. In hot weather you

may need to rinse each section right

after you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle

using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not

rub or press hard—you might scratch

the paint.

Automatic car wash

Your vehicle may be washed in an auto-

matic car wash, but remember that the

paint can be scratched by some types of

brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the

washing process itself. Scratching reduces

paint durability and gloss, especially on

darker colors. The manager of the car

wash should be able to advise you wheth-

er the process is safe for the paint on

your vehicle.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the antenna,

make sure to remove it before driving

your Toyota through an automatic car

wash.

267

Waxing your Toyota

Polishing and waxing is recommended

to maintain the original beauty of your

Toyota’s finish.

Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle

surface does not repel water well.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-

fore you begin waxing, even if you are

using a combined cleaner and wax.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If

the finish has become extremely weath-

ered, use a car−cleaning polish, fol-

lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-

low the manufacturer’s instructions and

precautions. Be sure to polish and wax

the chrome trim as well as the paint.

3. Wax the vehicle again when water

does not bead but remains on the sur-

face in large patches.

NOTICE

Always remove the plastic bumpers if

your vehicle is re−painted and placed

in a high heat paint waxing booth.

High temperatures could damage the

bumpers.

CAUTION

DDo not wash the vehicle floor with

water, or allow water to get onto

the floor when cleaning the vehicle

interior or exterior. Water may get

into audio components or other

electrical components above or un-

der the floor carpet (or mat) and

cause fire or malfunction; and it

may cause body corrosion.

DVehicles with side airbags:

Be careful not to splash water or

spill liquid on the floor. This may

prevent the side airbags from acti-

vating correctly, resulting in serious

injury.

Vinyl interior

The vinyl upholstery may be easily

cleaned with a mild soap or detergent

and water.

First vacuum over the upholstery to re-

move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or

soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the

vinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a few

minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt

and wipe off the soap with a clean damp

cloth. If all the dirt does not come off,

repeat the procedure. Commercial foam-

ing−type vinyl cleaners are also available

which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s

instructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline

or window cleaner on the interior.

Carpets

Use a good foam−type shampoo to

clean the carpets.

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove

as much dirt as possible. Several types of

foam cleaners are available; some are in

aerosol cans and others are powders or

liquids which you mix with water to pro-

duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,

use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.

Rub in overlapping circles.

Cleaning the interior

268

Do not apply water—the best results are

obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as

possible. Read the shampoo instructions

and follow them closely.

Seat belts

The seat belts may be cleaned with

mild soap and water or with lukewarm

water.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean-

ing, check the belts for excessive wear,

fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE

zDo not use dye or bleach on the

belts−it may weaken them.

zDo not use the belts until they be-

come dry.

Windows

The windows may be cleaned with any

household window cleaner.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the win-

dows, be careful not to scratch or

damage the heater wires on the rear

window.

Air conditioning control panel, audio,

instrument panel, console panel, and

switches

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-

warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE

zDo not use organic substances (sol-

vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,

etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.

These chemicals can cause discol-

oring, staining or peeling of the

surface.

zIf you use cleaners or polishing

agents, make sure their ingredients

do not include the substances men-

tioned above.

zIf you use a liquid car freshener, do

not apply the liquid onto the ve-

hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-

tain the ingredients mentioned

above. Immediately clean any spill

using the method mentioned above.

269

Leather interior

The leather upholstery may be cleaned

with neutral detergent for wool.

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampened

with 5% solution of neutral detergent for

wool. Then thoroughly wipe off all traces

of detergent with a clean damp cloth.

After cleaning or whenever any part of the

leather gets wet, dry with a soft clean

cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti-

lated shaded area.

NOTICE

zIf a stain should fail to come out

with a neutral detergent, apply a

cleaner that does not contain an

organic solvent.

zNever use organic substances such

as benzine, alcohol or gasoline, or

alkaline or acid solutions for clean-

ing the leather as these could

cause discoloring.

zUse of a nylon brush or synthetic

fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the

fine grained surface of the leather.

zMildew may develop on soiled leath-

er upholstery. Be especially careful

to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your

upholstery always clean.

zLong exposure to direct sunlight

may cause the leather surface to

harden and shrink. Keep your ve-

hicle in a shaded area, especially in

the summer.

zThe interior of your vehicle is apt

to heat up on hot summer days, so

avoid placing on the upholstery

items made of vinyl or plastic or

containing wax as these tend to

stick to leather when warm.

zImproper cleaning of the leather up-

holstery could result in discolor-

ation or staining.

If you have any questions about the

cleaning of your Toyota, your local

Toyota dealer will be pleased to answer

them.

270

271

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CARE

Maintenance requirements 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General maintenance 273. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Does your vehicle need repairing?? 275. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs 276. . . . . . . . .

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the

“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

SECTION 7

272

Maintenance requirements

Your Toyota vehicle has been designed for

fewer maintenance requirements with long-

er service intervals to save both your time

and money. However, each regular mainte-

nance, as well as day−to−day care, is

more important than ever before to ensure

smooth, trouble−free, safe, and economical

driving.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make

sure the specified maintenance, including

general maintenance service, is performed.

Note that both the new vehicle and

emission control system warranties specify

that proper maintenance and care must be

performed. See “Owner’s Warranty

Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual

Supplement” for complete warranty

information.

General maintenance

General maintenance items are those day−

to−day care practices that are important to

your vehicle for proper operation. It is the

owner’s responsibility to ensure that the

general maintenance items are performed

regularly.

These checks or inspections can be done

either by yourself or a qualified technician,

or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will be

pleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

The scheduled maintenance items listed in

the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or

“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are those

required to be serviced at regular inter-

vals.

For details of your maintenance schedule,

read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”

or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

It is recommended that only genuine

Toyota parts be used for maintenance

or for the repair of the emission con-

trol system.

The owner may elect to use non−Toyota

supplied parts for replacement pur-

poses without invalidating the emission

control system warranty. However, use

of replacement parts which are not of

equivalent quality may impair the effec-

tiveness of the emission control sys-

tems.

You may also elect to have mainte-

nance, replacement, or repair of the

emission control devices and system

performed by any automotive repair es-

tablishment or individual without invali-

dating this warranty. See “Owner’s War-

ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s

Manual Supplement” for complete war-

ranty information.

Where to go for service?

Toyota technicians are well−trained spe-

cialists and are kept up to date with the

latest service information through technical

bulletins, service tips, and in−dealership

training programs. They learn to work on

Toyotas before they work on your vehicle,

rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Toyota

dealer’s service department performs the

best job to meet the maintenance require-

ments on your vehicle–reliably and eco-

nomically.

Your copy of the repair order is proof that

all required maintenance has been per-

formed for warranty coverage. If any prob-

lems should arise with your vehicle while

under warranty, your Toyota dealer will

promptly take care of it. Again, be sure

to keep a copy of the repair order for any

service performed on your Toyota.

What about do−it−yourself maintenance?

Many of the maintenance items are easy

to do yourself if you have a little mechani-

cal ability and a few basic automotive

tools. Simple instructions for how to per-

form them are presented in Section 8.

273

If you are a skilled do−it−yourself

mechanic, the Toyota service manuals are

recommended. Please be aware that

do−it−yourself maintenance can affect your

warranty coverage. See “Owner’s Warranty

Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual

Supplement” for the details.

General maintenance

Listed below are the general maintenance

items that should be performed as fre-

quently as specified. In addition to check-

ing the items listed, if you notice any

unusual noise, smell or vibration, you

should investigate the cause or take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali-

fied service shop immediately. It is recom-

mended that any problem you notice be

brought to the attention of your dealer or

the qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION

Make these checks only with ade-

quate ventilation if you run the en-

gine.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Items listed below should be checked

from time to time, e.g. each time when

refueling.

Washer fluid

Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the

tank. See page 304 for additional informa-

tion.

Coolant level

Make sure the coolant level is between

the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the see−

through reservoir when the hybrid system

is cold. See page 288 for additional infor-

mation.

Radiator, condenser and hoses

Check that the front of the radiator and

condenser are clean and not blocked with

leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 290 for

additional information.

Brake fluid level

Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.

See page 290 for additional information.

Engine oil level

Check the level on the dipstick with the

engine turned off and the vehicle parked

on level spot. See page 286 for additional

information.

Exhaust system

If you notice any change in the sound of

the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have

the cause located and corrected immedi-

ately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” on

page 208.)

274

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be checked

regularly, e.g. while performing periodic

services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Lights

Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail

lights, turn signal lights, and other lights

are all working. Check headlight aim.

Service reminder indicators and warning

buzzers

Check that all service reminder indicators

and warning buzzers function properly.

Steering wheel

Be alert for changes in steering condition,

such as hard steering or strange noise.

Seats

Check that all front seat controls such as

seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. op-

erate smoothly and that all latches lock

securely in any position. Check that the

head restraint move up and down smooth-

ly and that the locks hold securely in any

latched position.

Seat belts

Check that the seat belt system such as

buckles, retractors and anchors operate

properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt

webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or dam-

aged.

Accelerator pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation and

uneven pedal effort or catching.

Brake pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation and

that the pedal has the proper clearance.

Check the brake booster function.

Brakes

In a safe place, check that the brakes do

not pull to one side when applied.

Parking brake

Check that the pedal has the proper travel

and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle

is held securely with only the parking

brake applied.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be performed

from time to time, unless otherwise

specified.

Fluid leaks

Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-

ter or other fluid after the vehicle has

been parked for a while. If you smell fuel

fumes or notice any leak, have the cause

found and corrected immediately.

Doors and engine hood

Check that all doors and trunk operate

smoothly and all latches lock securely.

Make sure the engine hood secondary

latch secures the hood from opening when

the primary latch is released.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the pressure with a gauge ev-

ery two weeks, or at least once a

month. See page 291 for additional

information.

275

Tire surface and wheel nuts

Check the tires carefully for cuts,

damage or excessive wear. See Sec-

tion 8−2 for additional information.

When checking the tires, make sure

no nuts are missing, and check the

nuts for looseness. Tighten them if

necessary.

Tire rotation

Rotate the tires according to the

maintenance schedule. (For sched-

uled maintenance information, please

refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-

ment”.) See page 295 for additional

information.

Be on the alert for changes in perfor-

mance, sounds, and visual tip−offs that

indicate service is needed. Some impor-

tant clues are as follows:

DEngine missing, stumbling, or pinging

DAppreciable loss of power

DStrange engine noises

DA fluid leak under the vehicle (however,

water dripping from the air conditioning

after use is normal.)

DChange in exhaust sound (This may

indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide

leak. Drive with the windows open and

have the exhaust system checked im-

mediately.)

DFlat−looking tire; excessive tire squeal

when cornering; uneven tire wear

DVehicle pulls to one side when driving

straight on a level road

DStrange noises related to suspension

movement

DLoss of brake effectiveness; spongy

feeling brake pedal; pedal almost

touches floor; vehicle pulls to one side

when braking

DCoolant temperature continually higher

than normal

If you notice any of these clues, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible. It probably needs adjustment or

repair.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving with the ve-

hicle unchecked. It could result in se-

rious vehicle damage and possibly

personal injury.

Does your vehicle need

repairing?

276

Some states have vehicle emission in-

spection programs which include OBD

(On−Board Diagnostics) checks.

The OBD system monitors the operation

of the emission control system. When the

OBD system determines that a problem

exists somewhere in the emission control

system, the malfunction indicator lamp

comes on. In this case, your vehicle may

not pass the I/M test and need to be

repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to

service the vehicle.

Even if the malfunction indicator lamp

does not come on, your vehicle may not

pass the I/M test as readiness codes

have not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically set

during ordinary driving. However, when the

battery is disconnected or run down, the

codes are erased. Also, depending on

your driving habits, the codes may not be

completely set.

Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had

come on recently due to temporary mal-

function such as a loose fuel tank cap,

your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go off

after taking several driving trips, but the

error code in the OBD system will not be

cleared unless about 40 trips or more are

taken.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

and the malfunction indicator lamp does

not come on, contact your Toyota dealer

to prepare the vehicle for re−testing.

Emissions inspection and

maintenance (I/M) programs

277

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Introduction

Engine compartment overview 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuse locations 279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Do−it−yourself service precautions 280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Positioning the jack 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parts and tools 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 8– 1

278

Engine compartment overview

1. Windshield washer fluid tank

2. Brake fluid reservoir

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Engine coolant reservoir

5. Inverter reservoir tank

6. Fuse block

7. Radiator and condenser

8. Engine oil level dipstick

9. Auxiliary battery

81p001g

279

81p002c

81p003b

81p005b

81p006c

Fuse locations

280

If you perform maintenance by yourself,

be sure to follow the correct procedure

given in this Section.

You should be aware that improper or in-

complete servicing may result in operating

problems.

Performing do−it−yourself maintenance

during the warranty period may affect your

warranty coverage. Read the separate

Toyota Warranty statement for details and

suggestions.

This Section gives instructions only for

those items that are relatively easy for an

owner to perform. As explained in Section

7, there are still a number of items that

must be done by a qualified technician

with special tools.

For information on tools and parts for do−

it−yourself maintenance, see “Parts and

tools” on page 283.

Utmost care should be taken when work-

ing on your vehicle to prevent accidental

injury. Here are a few precautions that

you should be especially careful to ob-

serve:

CAUTION

DWhen the hybrid system is on, keep

hands, clothing, and tools away

from the moving fan and engine

drive belts. (Removing rings,

watches, and ties is advisable.)

DRight after driving, the engine

compartment—the engine, radiator,

exhaust manifold and spark plug

boots, etc.—will be hot. So be care-

ful not to touch them. Oil, fluids

and spark plugs may also be hot.

DIf the hybrid system is hot, do not

remove the radiator cap or loosen

the drain plugs to prevent burning

yourself.

DDo not leave anything that may

burn easily, such as paper or rags,

in the engine compartment.

DDo not smoke, cause sparks or al-

low open flames around fuel or the

batteries. Their fumes are flam-

mable.

DWhen the hybrid system is operat-

ing with the “READY” light on, the

engine is automatically started in

some case. When you inspect the

engine compartment, be sure to

press the “POWER” switch to the

“OFF” mode.

DDo not get under your vehicle with

just the body jack supporting it. Al-

ways use automotive jack stands or

other solid supports.

DBe sure that the hybrid system is

in the “OFF” mode if you work near

the electric cooling fans or radiator

grille. With the ignition on, the

electric cooling fans will automati-

cally start to run if the engine cool-

ant temperature is high and/or the

air conditioning is on.

DUse eye protection whenever you

work on or under your vehicle

where you may be exposed to fly-

ing or falling material, fluid spray,

etc.

DBe extremely cautious when work-

ing on the batteries. It contains poi-

sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid

or strong alkali.

Do−it−yourself service

precautions

281

DUsed engine oil contains potentially

harmful contaminants which may

cause skin disorders such as in-

flammation or skin cancer, so care

should be taken to avoid prolonged

and repeated contact with it. To re-

move used engine oil from your

skin, wash thoroughly with soap

and water.

DDo not leave used oil within the

reach of children.

DDispose of used oil and filter only

in a safe and acceptable manner.

Do not dispose of used oil and fil-

ter in household trash, in sewers or

onto the ground. Call your dealer

for information concerning recycling

or disposal.

DTake care when filling the brake

fluid reservoir because brake fluid

can harm your eyes and damage

painted surfaces. If fluid gets in

your eyes, flush your eyes with

clean water immediately. If you still

feel uncomfortable with your eyes,

go to the doctor.

DWhen servicing the vehicle with the

smart entry and start system, be

sure to keep the smart key away

from the vehicle. If the key is left

in the vehicle, the hybrid system

may start by pressing the “POWER”

switch with the brake pedal de-

pressed.

NOTICE

zRemember that batteries and igni-

tion cable carry high currents or

voltages. Be careful of accidentally

causing a short circuit.

zAdd only “Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” or similar high quality eth-

ylene glycol based non−silicate,

non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−bo-

rate coolant with long−life hybrid

organic acid technology to fill the

radiator. “Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is a mixture of 50% cool-

ant and 50% deionized water (for

the U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45%

deionized water (for Canada).

zIf you spill some of the coolant, be

sure to wash it off with water to

prevent it from damaging the parts

or paint.

zDo not allow dirt or anything else

to fall through the spark plug holes.

zDo not pry the outer electrode of

spark plug against the center elec-

trode.

zUse only spark plugs of the speci-

fied type. Using other types will

cause engine damage, loss of per-

formance or radio noise.

zIf you spill the fluid, be sure to

wash it off with water to prevent it

from damaging the parts or paint.

zDo not drive with the air cleaner

filter removed, or excessive engine

wear could result. Also backfiring

could cause a fire in the engine

compartment.

zBe careful not to scratch the glass

surface with the wiper frame.

zWhen closing the hood, check to

see that you have not forgotten any

tools, rags, etc.

282

Positioning the jack

81p008d

Front

81p009d

Rear

When jacking up your vehicle with the

jack, position the jack correctly as

shown in the illustrations.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe the

following to reduce the possibility of

personal injury:

DFollow jacking instructions.

DDo not put any part of your body

under the vehicle supported by the

jack. Personal injury may occur.

DDo not start or run the engine while

your vehicle is supported by the

jack.

DStop the vehicle on a level firm

ground, firmly set the parking brake

and put the transaxle in “P”.

DMake sure to set the jack properly

in the jack point. Raising the ve-

hicle with jack improperly posi-

tioned will damage the vehicle or

may allow the vehicle to fall off the

jack and cause personal injury.

DNever get under the vehicle when

the vehicle is supported by the jack

alone.

DDo not raise the vehicle with some-

one in the vehicle.

DWhen raising the vehicle, do not

place any objects on top of or un-

derneath the jack.

NOTICE

Make sure to place the jack correctly,

or your vehicle may be damaged.

283

Parts and tools

Here is a list of parts and tools you will

need to perform do−it−yourself mainte-

nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-

signed in metric sizes, so your tools must

be metric.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

DEngine oil API grade SL “Energy−Con-

serving” or ILSAC multigrade having

viscosity proper for your climate

Tools:

DRag or paper towel

DFunnel (only for adding oil)

CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

D“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or

similar high quality ethylene glycol

based non−silicate, non−amine, non−ni-

trite, and non−borate coolant with long−

life hybrid organic acid technology.

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a

mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deion-

ized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55%

coolant and 45% deionized water (for

Canada).

Tools:

DFunnel (only for adding coolant)

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID

Parts (if level is low):

DSAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

brake fluid

Tools:

DRag or paper towel

DFunnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING AUXILIARY BATTERY CON-

DITION

Tools:

DWarm water

DBaking soda

DGrease

DConventional wrench (for terminal

clamp bolts)

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

DFuse with same amperage rating as

original

ADDING WASHER FLUID

Parts:

DWater

DWasher fluid containing antifreeze (for

winter use)

Tools:

DFunnel

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS

Parts:

DBulb with same number and wattage

rating as original (See charts in “Re-

placing light bulbs–” on page 304.)

Tools:

DScrewdriver

284

285

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Engine and Chassis

Checking the engine oil level 286. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking the coolant level 288. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking the radiator and condenser 290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking brake fluid 290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking tire inflation pressure 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking and replacing tires 293. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rotating tires 295. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing snow tires and chains 296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing wheels 297. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Aluminum wheel precautions 298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 8– 2

286

82p001a

Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

With the hybrid system at operating

temperature and turned off, check the

oil level on the dipstick.

1. To get a correct reading, the vehicle

should be on a level ground. After turn-

ing off the hybrid system, wait a few

minutes for the oil to drain back into

the bottom of the engine.

2. Pull the dipstick out, hold the rag un-

der the end and wipe it clean.

3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as far

as it will go, or the reading will not be

correct.

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil

level while holding a rag under the

end.

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch the hot ex-

haust manifold.

NOTICE

Be careful not to drop engine oil on

the vehicle components.

If the oil level is below or only slightly

above the low level, add engine oil of

the same type as already in the engine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engine

oil in small quantities at a time, checking

the dipstick. We recommend that you use

a funnel when adding oil.

The approximate quantity of oil needed to

raise the level between low and full on the

dipstick is indicated below for reference.

When the level reaches within the correct

range, install the filler cap hand−tight.

Oil quantity, L (qt., Imp.qt.):

1.5 (1.6, 1.3)

NOTICE

zBe careful not to spill engine oil on

the vehicle components.

zAvoid overfilling, or the hybrid sys-

tem could be damaged.

zCheck the oil level on the dipstick

once again after adding the oil.

Checking the engine oil level

287

ENGINE OIL SELECTION

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in

your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

to satisfy the following grade and viscos-

ity.

Oil grade:

API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” or

ILSAC multigrade engine oil.

Recommended viscosity:

SAE 5W−30

oil008

Outside temperature

SAE 5W−30 is the best choice, for good

fuel economy, and good starting in cold

weather.

If SAE 5W−30 oil is not available, SAE

10W−30 oil may be used. However, it

should be replaced with SAE 5W−30 at

the next oil change.

82P103

API service symbol

ILSAC certification mark

288

Oil identification marks

Either or both API registered marks are

added to some oil containers to help

you select the oil you should use.

The API Service Symbol is located any-

where on the outside of the container.

The top portion of the label shows the oil

quality by API (American Petroleum Insti-

tute) designations such as SL. The center

portion of the label shows the SAE viscos-

ity grade such as SAE 5W−30. “Energy−

Conserving” shown in the lower portion,

indicates that the oil has fuel−saving ca-

pabilities.

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan-

dardization and Approval Committee) Certi-

fication Mark is displayed on the front of

the container.

To ensure excellent lubrication perfor-

mance for your engine, “Toyota Genuine

Motor Oil” is available, which has been

specifically tested and approved for all

Toyota engines.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-

ther details about “Toyota Genuine Motor

Oil”.

CAUTION

The coolant heat storage tank reaches

high temperature inside. It is danger-

ous if hot coolant is discharged when

replacing. For replacement of the

coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.

Look at the see−through coolant reser-

voir when the hybrid system is cold.

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is

between the “FULL” and “LOW” lines

on the reservoir. If the level is low, add

the coolant. (For the coolant type, see

“Coolant type selection” described be-

low.)

The coolant level in the reservoir will vary

with hybrid system temperature. However,

if the level is on or below the “LOW” line,

add coolant. Bring the level up to the

“FULL” line.

If the coolant level drops within a short

time after replenishing, there may be a

leak in the system. Visually check the

radiator, hoses, radiator cap and drain

cock and water pump.

Checking the coolant level

289

If you can find no leak, have your Toyota

dealer test the cap pressure and check

for leaks in the cooling system.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do not

remove the radiator cap when the en-

gine is hot.

Coolant type selection

Use of improper coolants may damage

your cooling system.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

or similar high quality ethylene glycol

based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,

and non−borate coolant with long−life

hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant

with long−life hybrid organic acid

technology is a combination of low

phosphates and organic acids.)

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and

50% deionized water. This coolant pro-

vides protection down to about −35_C

(−31_F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and

45% deionized water. This coolant pro-

vides protection down to about −42_C

(−44_F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

Toyota recommends “Toyota Super Long

Life Coolant”, which has been tested to

ensure that it will not cause corrosion nor

result in malfunction of your coolant sys-

tem with proper usage. “Toyota Super

Long Life Coolant” is formulated with

long−life hybrid organic acid technology

and has been specifically designed to

avoid cooling system malfunction on

Toyota vehicles.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-

ther details.

290

If any of the above parts are extremely

dirty or you are not sure of their condi-

tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, be care-

ful not to touch the radiator or con-

denser when the engine is hot.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the radiator

and condenser, do not perform the

work by yourself.

Checking brake fluid

82p002b

To check the fluid level, simply look at

the see−through reservoir. The level

should be between the “MAX” and

“MIN” lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go

down slightly as the brake pads wear or

when the fluid level in the accumulator is

high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refueling,

it may indicate a serious mechanical prob-

lem.

If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or

FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 brake fluid to

the brake reservoir.

Refilling brake fluid:

1. Turn the hybrid system off.

2. Depress the brake pedal more than 40

times.

3. Remove the reservoir cap by hand.

Add brake fluid up to the “MAX” line.

If you do not follow the procedure above,

the reservoir may overflow.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once

opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from

the air, and excess moisture can cause a

dangerous loss of braking.

CAUTION

Take care when filling the reservoir

because brake fluid can harm your

hands or eyes. If fluid gets on your

hands or in your eyes, flush the af-

fected area with clean water immedi-

ately. If you still feel uncomfortable

with your hands or eyes, go to the

doctor.

Checking the radiator and

condenser

291

NOTICE

If you spill the fluid, be sure to wipe

it off to prevent it from damaging the

parts or painting.

82p105

Keep your tire inflation pressures

at the proper level.

The recommended cold tire inflation

pressures, tire sizes and the com-

bined weight of occupants and cargo

(vehicle capacity weight) are de-

scribed on pages 312 and 315. They

are also described on the tire and

loading information label as shown.

You should check the tire inflation

pressure every two weeks, or at least

once a month. And do not forget the

spare!

The following instructions for

checking tire inflation pressure

should be observed:

DThe pressure should be

checked only when the tires are

cold. If your vehicle has been

parked for at least 3 hours and has

not been driven for more than 1.5

km or 1 mile since, you will get

an accurate cold tire inflation pres-

sure reading.

Checking tire inflation

pressure

292

DAlways use a tire inflation pres-

sure gauge. The appearance of

a tire can be misleading. Besides,

tire inflation pressures that are

even just a few pounds off can de-

grade ride and handling.

DTake special care when adding

air to the compact spare tire.

The smaller tire size can gain

pressure very quickly. Add com-

pressed air in small quantities and

check the pressure often until it

reaches the specified pressure.

DDo not bleed or reduce tire

inflation pressure after driving.

It is normal for the tire inflation

pressure to be higher after driving.

DNever exceed the vehicle capac-

ity weight. Passenger and lug-

gage weight should be located so

that the vehicle is balanced.

Tire inflation

pressure gauge

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT

PROCEDURE

1. Remove the tire valve cap.

2. Press the tip of the tire inflation

pressure gauge to the tire valve.

3. Read the pressure using the grad-

uations of the gauge.

4. In case the tire inflation pressure

is not within the prescribed range,

insert the compressed air from the

valve. In case of applying too much

air, press the center of the valve

and release the air to adjust.

5. After completing the tire inflation

pressure measurement and adjust-

ment, apply soapy water to the

valve and check for leakage.

6. Install the tire valve cap.

If a gauge and air pump are not avail-

able, have your vehicle checked by

your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to reinstall the tire valve

caps. Without the valve caps, dirt

or moisture could get into the

valve core and cause air leakage.

If the caps have been lost, have

new ones put on as soon as pos-

sible.

Incorrect tire inflation pressure

may waste fuel, reduce the comfort

of driving, reduce tire life and

make your vehicle less safe to

drive.

If a tire frequently needs refilling,

have it checked by your Toyota deal-

er.

293

CAUTION

Keep your tires properly inflated.

Otherwise, the following condi-

tions may occur and cause an ac-

cident resulting in death or seri-

ous injuries.

Low tire pressure (underinfla-

tion)—

DExcessive wear

DUneven wear

DPoor handling

DPossibility of blowouts from an

overheated tire

DPoor sealing of the tire bead

DWheel deformation and/or tire

separation

DA greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

High tire pressure (overinfla-

tion)—

DPoor handling

DExcessive wear

DUneven wear

DA greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRES

Check the tire’s tread for tread

wear indicators. If the indicators

show, replace the tires. The loca-

tion of tread wear indicators is

shown by the “TWI” or “Δ” marks,

etc., molded on the sidewall of

each tire.

Checking and replacing tires

294

The tires on your Toyota have built−in

tread wear indicators to help you

know when the tires need replace-

ment. When the tread depth wears to

1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indica-

tors will appear. If you can see the

indicators in two or more adjacent

grooves, the tire should be replaced.

The lower the tread, the higher the

risk of skidding.

The effectiveness of snow tires is

lost if the tread wears down below

4 mm (0.16 in.).

If you have tire damage such as

cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to

expose the fabric, or bulges indi-

cating internal damage, the tire

should be replaced.

If a tire often goes flat or cannot be

properly repaired due to the size or

location of a cut or other damage, it

should be replaced. If you are not

sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

If air loss occurs while driving, do not

continue driving. Driving even a short

distance can damage a tire beyond

repair.

Any tires which are over 6 years

old must be checked by a qualified

technician even if damage is not

obvious.

Tires deteriorate with age even if they

have never or seldom been used.

This applies also to the spare tire and

tires stored for future use.

REPLACING YOUR TIRES

When replacing a tire, use a tire of

the same size and construction,

and the same or greater load ca-

pacity as the originally installed

tires.

Using any other size or type of tire

may seriously affect handling, ride,

speedometer/odometer calibration,

ground clearance, and clearance be-

tween the body and tires or snow

chains.

Check that the maximum load of the

replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the

Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR)

of either the front axle or the rear

axle, whichever is greater. As for the

maximum load of the tire, see the load

limit at maximum cold tire inflation

pressure mentioned on the sidewall

of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle

Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the Cer-

tification Label. For details about the

sidewall of the tire and the Certifica-

tion Label, see pages 218 and 216.

295

CAUTION

Observe the following instruc-

tions. Otherwise, an accident

may occur resulting in death or

serious injuries.

DDo not mix radial, bias belted,

or bias−ply tires on your ve-

hicle, as this may cause dan-

gerous handling characteris-

tics resulting in loss of control.

DDo not use tires other than the

manufacturer’s recommended

size, as this may cause danger-

ous handling characteristics

resulting in loss of control.

Toyota recommends all four tires,

or at least both front or rear tires

be replaced at a time as a set.

See “If you have a flat tire” on page

247 for tire change procedure.

When a tire is replaced, the wheel

should always be balanced.

An unbalanced wheel may affect ve-

hicle handling and tire life. Wheels

can get out of balance with regular

use and should therefore be balanced

occasionally.

When replacing a tubeless tire, the

air valve should also be replaced

with a new one.

82p104a

To equalize tire wear and help ex-

tend tire life, Toyota recommends

that you rotate your tires accord-

ing to the maintenance schedule.

(For scheduled maintenance infor-

mation, please refer to the “Sched-

uled Maintenance Guide” or “Own-

er’s Manual Supplement”.)

However, the most appropriate tim-

ing for tire rotation may vary ac-

cording to your driving habits and

road surface conditions.

The wheel assemblies must be ro-

tated as illustrated above.

Rotating tires

296

When rotating tires, check for uneven

wear and damage. Abnormal wear is

usually caused by incorrect tire infla-

tion pressure, improper wheel align-

ment, out−of−balance wheels, or se-

vere braking.

CAUTION

Do not include a compact spare

tire when rotating the tires. It is

designed for temporary use only.

WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES OR

CHAINS

Snow tires or chains are recommended

when driving on snow or ice.

On wet or dry roads, conventional tires

provide better traction than snow tires.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION

If you need snow tires, select tires of

the same size, construction and load

capacity as the originally installed tires.

Do not use tires other than those men-

tioned above. Do not install studded tires

without first checking local regulations for

possible restrictions.

CAUTION

Do not use snow tires other than the

manufacturer’s recommended size, as

this may cause dangerous handling

characteristics resulting in loss of

control. Otherwise, an accident may

occur resulting in death or serious

injuries.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

Snow tires should be installed on all

wheels.

Installing snow tires on the front wheels

only can lead to an excessive difference

in road grip capability between the front

and rear tires which could cause loss of

vehicle control.

When storing removed tires, you should

store them in a cool dry place.

Mark the direction of rotation and be sure

to install them in the same direction when

replacing.

CAUTION

DDo not drive with the snow tires

incorrectly inflated.

DNever drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)

with any type of snow tires.

Installing snow tires and

chains

297

TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

Use the tire chains of correct size.

Regulations regarding the use of tire

chains vary according to location or

type of road, so always check local reg-

ulations before installing chains.

CHAIN INSTALLATION

Install the chains on the front tires as

tightly as possible. Do not use tire

chains on the rear tires. Retighten

chains after driving 0.5 − 1.0 km (1/4 −

1/2 mile).

When installing chains on your tires, care-

fully follow the instructions of the chain

manufacturer.

If wheel covers are used, they will be

scratched by the chain band, so remove

the covers before putting on the chains.

CAUTION

DDo not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or

the chain manufacturer’s recom-

mended speed limit, whichever is

lower.

DDrive carefully avoiding bumps,

holes, and sharp turns, which may

cause the vehicle to bounce.

DAvoid sharp turns or locked−wheel

braking, as use of chains may ad-

versely affect vehicle handling.

DWhen driving with chains installed,

be sure to drive carefully. Slow

down before entering curves to

avoid losing control of the vehicle.

Otherwise an accident may occur.

NOTICE

Do not attempt to use a tire chain on

the compact spare tire, as it may re-

sult in damage to the vehicle as well

as the tire.

WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS

If you have wheel damage such as

bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the

wheel should be replaced.

If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,

the tire may slip off the wheel or cause

loss of handling control.

WHEEL SELECTION

When replacing wheels, care should be

taken to ensure that the wheels are re-

placed by ones with the same load ca-

pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

This must be observed on compact spare

tire, too.

Correct replacement wheels are available

at your Toyota dealer.

A wheel of a different size or type may

adversely affect handling, wheel and bear-

ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-

eter calibration, stopping ability, headlight

aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-

ance, and tire or snow chain clearance to

the body and chassis.

Replacing wheels

298

Replacement with used wheels is not rec-

ommended as they may have been sub-

jected to rough treatment or high mileage

and could fail without warning. Also, bent

wheels which have been straightened may

have structural damage and therefore

should not be used. Never use an inner

tube in a leaking wheel which is designed

for a tubeless tire.

DWhen installing aluminum wheels,

check that the wheel nuts are tight

after driving your vehicle the first 1600

km (1000 miles).

DIf you have rotated, repaired, or

changed your tires, check that the

wheel nuts are still tight after driving

1600 km (1000 miles).

DWhen using tire chains, be careful not

to damage the aluminum wheels.

DUse only Toyota wheel nuts and

wrench designed for your aluminum

wheels.

DWhen balancing your wheels, use only

Toyota balance weights or equivalent

and a plastic or rubber hammer.

DAs with any wheel, periodically check

your aluminum wheels for damage. If

damaged, replace immediately.

Aluminum wheel precautions

299

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Electrical components

Checking auxiliary battery condition 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auxiliary battery recharging precautionss 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking and replacing fuses 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adding washer fluid 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing light bulbs 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 8– 3

300

CAUTION

AUXILIARY BATTERY PRECAUTIONS

When the auxiliary battery must be

replaced, use the Prius designated

battery.

The auxiliary battery produces flam-

mable and explosive hydrogen gas.

DDo not cause a spark from the bat-

tery with tools.

DDo not smoke or light a match near

the battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonous

and corrosive sulfuric acid.

DAvoid contact with eyes, skin or

clothes.

DNever ingest electrolyte.

DWear protective safety glasses when

working near the battery.

DKeep children away from the bat-

tery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

DIf electrolyte gets in your eyes,

flush your eyes with clean water

and get immediate medical atten-

tion. If possible, continue to apply

water with a sponge or cloth while

en route to the medical office.

DIf electrolyte gets on your skin,

thoroughly wash the contact area. If

you feel pain or burn, get medical

attention immediately.

DIf electrolyte gets on your clothes,

there is a possibility of its soaking

through to your skin, so immediate-

ly take off the exposed clothing and

follow the procedure above, if nec-

essary.

DIf you accidentally swallow electro-

lyte, drink a large quantity of water

or milk. Follow with milk of magne-

sia, beaten raw egg or vegetable

oil. Then go immediately for emer-

gency help.

83p035

Open the back door. Remove the lug-

gage storage box and auxiliary battery

cover.

If the back door does not open, see “If

you cannot operate back door opener” on

page 262.

Checking auxiliary battery

condition—

—Precautions —Checking auxiliary battery

exterior

301

83p001c

Terminals

Ground cableHold−down clamp

Check the battery for corroded or loose

terminal connections, cracks, or loose

hold−down clamp.

a. If the battery is corroded, wash it off

with a solution of warm water and bak-

ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-

nals with grease to prevent further cor-

rosion.

b. If the terminal connections are loose,

tighten their clamp nuts—but do not

overtighten.

c. Tighten the hold−down clamp only

enough to keep the battery firmly in

place. Overtightening may damage the

battery case.

NOTICE

zBe sure the hybrid system and all

accessories are off before perform-

ing maintenance.

zWhen checking the battery, remove

the ground cable from the negative

terminal (“–” mark) first and rein-

stall it last.

zBe careful not to cause a short cir-

cuit with tools.

zTake care no solution gets into the

battery when washing it.

If the auxiliary battery is disconnected

or run down, the power window and back

door may not operate automatically and

the jam protection function will not func-

tion correctly and does not open the back

door after you reconnect, replace or re-

charge the battery. In any of these cases,

you should normalize each system. To

normalize them, see “Power windows” on

page 42 and “Back door” on page 41.

Before you disconnect the auxiliary bat-

tery, confirm the shift position is “P” and

apply the parking brake completely.

After you reconnect the auxiliary battery,

shift the shift lever to “N” and confirm the

shift position is “N” when the “IG−ON”

mode is enabled.

After connecting the cables, the hybrid

system may not start by pushing the

“POWER” switch. In that case, push it

once again.

302

During recharging, the battery is pro-

ducing hydrogen gas.

Therefore, before recharging:

1. If recharging with the battery installed

on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect

the ground cable.

2. Make sure the power switch on the

recharger is off when connecting the

charger cables to the battery and when

disconnecting them.

CAUTION

DAlways charge the battery in an un-

confined area. Do not charge the

battery in a garage or closed room

where there is not sufficient ventila-

tion.

DOnly do a slow charge (3.5A or

less). Charging at a quicker rate is

dangerous. The battery may ex-

plode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE

Never recharge the battery with the

hybrid system on. Also, be sure all

accessories are turned off.

83p003

Type A

Type B

Type C

Good Blown

Auxiliary battery recharging

precautions Checking and replacing fuses

303

83p004b

If the headlights or other electrical

components do not work, check the

fuses. If any of the fuses are blown,

they must be replaced.

See “Fuse locations” on page 279 for

locations of the fuses.

Turn the hybrid system and inoperative

component off. Pull the suspected fuse

straight out and check it.

Determine which fuse may be causing the

problem. The lid of the fuse box shows

the name of the circuit for each fuse. See

page 316 for the functions controlled by

each circuit.

Type A fuses can be pulled out by the

pull−out tool. The location of the pull−out

tool is shown in the illustration.

If you are not sure whether the fuse has

blown, try replacing the suspected fuse

with one that you know is good.

If the fuse has blown, push a new fuse

into the clip.

Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-

ing designated on the fuse box lid.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in an

emergency you can pull out the “DOME”

or “OBDII” fuse, which may be dispens-

able for normal driving, and use it if its

amperage rating is the same.

If you cannot use one of the same amper-

age, use one that is lower, but as close

to the rating as possible. If the amperage

is lower than that specified, the fuse

might blow out again. but this does not

indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get

the correct fuse as soon as possible and

return the substitute to its original clip.

It is a good idea to purchase a set of

spare fuses and keep them in your ve-

hicle for emergencies.

If the new fuse immediately blows out,

there is a problem with the electrical sys-

tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it as

soon as possible.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher am-

perage rating, or any other object, in

place of a fuse. This may cause ex-

tensive damage and possibly a fire.

304

If any washer does not work, the wash-

er tank may be empty. Add washer

fluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid.

However, in cold areas where tempera-

tures range below the freezing point, use

washer fluid containing antifreeze. This

product is available at your Toyota dealer

and most auto parts stores. Follow the

manufacturer’s directions for how much to

mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or any

other substitute because it may dam-

age your vehicle’s paint.

The following illustrations show how to

gain access to the bulbs. When replacing

a bulb, make sure the hybrid system and

light switch are off. Use bulbs with the

wattage ratings given in the table.

CAUTION

DTo prevent burning yourself, do not

replace the light bulbs while they

are hot.

DHalogen bulbs have pressurized gas

inside and require special handling.

They can burst or shatter if

scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb

only by its plastic or metal case.

Do not touch the glass part of a

bulb with bare hands.

Vehicles with discharge headlights—

DDo not touch the high voltage sock-

et when the headlight turns on.

20000 V is momentarily generated

and may cause severe injury by

electric shock.

DDo not disassemble, repair or take

apart the headlight bulbs, connec-

tor, power supply circuits and ro-

tate components. Or you may be

injured by electric shocks. Call your

dealer when the headlights fail to

work or have to be replaced or dis-

posed of.

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.

The inside of the lens of exterior lights

such as headlights may temporarily fog up

when the lense becomes wet in the rain

or in a car wash. This is not a problem

because the fogging is caused by the

temperature difference between the outside

and inside of the lense, just like the

windshield fogs up in the rain. However, if

there is a large drop of water on the

inside of the lense, or if there is water

pooled inside the light, contact your

Toyota dealer.

Adding washer fluid Replacing light bulbs—

305

Light bulbs Bulb

No. WType

Headlights

Discharge headlights

Halogen headlights

—

60/55

Front fog lights 9006 51 C

Parking lights — 5 D

Front turn signal

lights —21 D

Rear turn signal lights —21 D

Tail lights — 5 D

Back−up lights 7440 21 D

License plate lights — 5 D

Interior lights — 8 E

Personal lights — 5 D

Door courtesy lights — 5 D

Vanity lights — 5 E

Luggage compart-

ment light — 5 E

A: D2R Discharge bulbs

B: HB2 Halogen bulbs

C: HB4 Halogen bulbs

D: Wedge base bulbs

E: Double end bulbs

—Headlights

83p030

1. Open the hood. Remove the clips

and take out the cover.

Remove and install the clips as shown in

the following illustrations.

83p031

Removing clip

83p032

Installing clip

306

83p010a

2. RIGHT−HAND HEADLIGHT ONLY: Re-

move the clip and take out the air

cleaner inlet.

Remove and install the clip as shown in

the following illustrations.

83p011

Removing clip

83p012

Installing clip

83p013a

3. Unplug the connector. Turn the bulb

cover counter−clockwise and remove

it.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

307

83p014a

4. Release the bulb retaining spring

and remove the bulb along with the

socket. Install a new bulb into the

socket and return the bulb retaining

spring to its original position.

To install a bulb, align the tabs of the

bulb with the cutout of the mounting hole.

83p015b

5. Install the bulb cover and turn it

clockwise. Plug in the connector.

If either the left or right front fog lights

burns out, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

Do not try to replace the front fog

light bulbs by yourself. You may dam-

age the vehicle.

—Front fog lights

308

—Parking lights

83p016a

83p017a

83p018a

83p019b

83p023a

83p024b

—Front turn signal lights —Rear turn signal, tail and

back−up lights

309

83p025c

a: Rear turn signal light

b: Back−up light

c: Tail light

83p026b

Remove the cover.

83p027a

83p028b

—License plate lights

310

311

SPECIFICATIONS

Dimensions and weight 312. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electric motor 312. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enginee 312. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel 313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hybrid vehicle battery 313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service specifications 313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tires 315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuses 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 9

312

Overall length mm (in.) 4445 (175.0)

Overall width mm (in.) 1725 (67.9)

Overall height mm (in.) 1500 (59.1)*

Wheelbase mm (in.) 2700 (106.3)

Front tread mm (in.) 1505 (59.3)

Rear tread mm (in.) 1480 (58.3)

Vehicle capacity weight

(occupants + luggage)

kg (lb.) 385 (845)

*: Unladen vehicle

Electric motor

Type: Permanent magnet synchronous

motor (water cooling)

Maximum output:

50/1200 − 1540 kW/rpm

Maximum torque:

400/0 − 1200 N·m/rpm

Model: 1NZ−FXE

Type: 4−cylinder in line, 4 cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke, mm (in.):

75.0 x 84.7 (2.95 x 3.33)

Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):

1497 (91.4)

Dimensions and weight Engine

313

Fuel type:

Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87

(Research Octane Number 91) or

higher

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., lmp.gal.):

45 (11.9, 9.9)

Hybrid vehicle battery

Type: Nickel−Metal hydride battery

Voltage: 7.2 V

Capacity: 6.5 Ah (3HR)

Quantity: 28

Overall voltage: 201.6 V

Service specifications

ENGINE

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):

Intake 0.17 − 0.23 (0.007 − 0.009)

Exhaust 0.27 − 0.33 (0.011 − 0.013)

Spark plug type:

DENSO SK16R11

NGK IFR5A11

Spark plug gap, mm (in.):

1.1 (0.043)

Fuel

314

ENGINE LUBRICATION

Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt.,

lmp.qt.):

With filter 3.7 (3.9, 3.3)

Without filter 3.4 (3.6, 3.0)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your

Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved “Toyota

Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the

following grade and viscosity.

Oil grade:

API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” or

ILSAC multigrade engine oil.

Recommended oil viscosity:

SAE 5W−30

oil008

Outside temperature

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further

details.

COOLING SYSTEM

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp.qt.):

For gasoline engine 8.6 (9.0, 7.5)

For electric motor

and inverter and

converter 2.7 (2.9, 2.4)

Coolant type:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is

used in your Toyota vehicle at factory

fill. In order to avoid technical prob-

lems, only use “Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” or similar high quality ethyl-

ene glycol based non−silicate, non−

amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate

coolant with long−life hybrid organic

acid technology. (Coolant with long−life

hybrid organic acid technology is a

combination of low phosphates and or-

ganic acids.)

Do not use plain water alone.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for

further details.

315

AUXILIARY BATTERY

Open voltage at 20_C (68_F):

12.6 − 12.8 V Fully charged

12.2 − 12.4 V Half charged

11. 5 − 11.9 V Discharged

[Voltage that is checked 20 minutes after

the key is removed with all the lights

turned off]

Charging rates: 3.5 A max.

HYBRID TRANSAXLE

Fluid capacity (drain and refill),

L (qt., Imp.qt.):

3.6 (3.8, 3.2)

Fluid type:

“Toyota Genuine ATF WS” or

equivalent

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further

details.

BRAKES

Minimum pedal clearance when depressed

with the force of 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf)

with the traction motor running, mm (in.):

101.0 (3.98)

Pedal free play, mm (in.):

1 − 4 (0.04 − 0.16)

Parking brake adjustment when depressed

with the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66 lbf):

6 − 9 clicks

Fluid type:

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3

STEERING

Wheel free play:

Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Tires

Tire size and inflation pressure:

Tire size kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)

Standard

Front P185/65R15 86S

240 (2.4, 35)

Rear P185/65R15 86S

230 (2.3, 33)

Spare

T125/70D16 96M

420 (4.2, 60)

Wheel size:

Standard 15 x 6JJ

Spare 16 x 4T

Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m,

ft·lbf):

103 (10.5, 76)

NOTE: For a complete information

on tires (e.g. replacing tires

or replacing wheels), see

“Checking tire inflation pres-

sure” through “Aluminum

wheel precautions”, page

291 through 298.

316

90p007b

Instrument panel

1. PWR 30 A: Power windows

2. DEF 40 A: Rear window defogger

3. M/HTR 15 A: Outside rear view mirror

heater

4. WIP 30 A: Windshield wiper

5. RR WIP 15 A: Rear wiper

6. WSH 20 A: Washer

7. ECU−IG 7.5 A: Smart entry and start

system, power windows, multi−informa-

tion display, electric power steering,

theft deterrent system

90p005b

Engine compartment

8. GAUGE 10 A: Gauge and meter, back−

up lights, emergency flasher, power

windows

9. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis sys-

tem

10. STOP 7.5 A: Stop lights

11. DOOR 25 A: Power door lock system

12. ACC−B 25 A: “POWER OUTLET”,

“ACC” fuses

13. ECU−B 15 A: Multi−information display,

power windows, air conditioning system

14. AM1 7.5 A: Hybrid system

90p008b

Luggage compartment

15. TAIL 10 A: Tail lights, license plates

light, parking lights

16. PANEL 7.5 A: Multi−information dis-

play, clock, audio system, instrument

panel lights

17. A/C (HTR) 10 A: Air conditioning sys-

tem

18. FR DOOR 20 A: Power windows

19. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlet

20. ACC 7.5 A: Audio system, multi−infor-

mation display, clock

21. PWR OUTLET FR 15 A: Power outlet

Fuses

317

22. IGN 7.5 A: Hybrid system, hybrid ve-

hicle immobilizer system, SRS airbags

23. SPARE 30 A: Spare

24. SPARE 15 A: Spare

25. DRL 7.5 A: Daytime running light sys-

tem

26. H−LP LO RH 15 A (Vehicles with dis-

charged headlight) or 10 A (Vehicles

with halogen headlight): Right−hand

headlight (low beam)

27. H−LP LO LH 15 A (Vehicles with dis-

charged headlight) or 10 A (Vehicles

with halogen headlight): Left−hand

headlight (low beam)

28. H−LP HI RH 10 A: Right−hand head-

light (high beam)

29. H−LP HI LH 10 A: Left−hand headlight

(high beam)

30. EFI 15 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-

tem/sequential multiport fuel injection

system

31. AM2 15 A: “IGN” fuse, ignition system

32. HORN 10 A: Horn

33. HEV 20 A: Hybrid system

34. P CON MAIN 7.5 A: Parking control

system, hybrid vehicle immobilizer sys-

tem

35. ABS−1 25 A: Anti−lock brake system

36. ETCS 10 A: Electronic throttle control

system

37. BATT FAN 10 A: Battery cooling fan

38. HAZ 10 A: Turn signal lights, emergen-

cy flasher

39. DOME 15 A: Audio system, interior

lights, smart entry and start system,

gauge and meter, turn signal lights,

luggage room light, clock

40. ABS MAIN3 15 A: Anti−lock brake sys-

tem

41. ABS MAIN2 10 A: Anti−lock brake sys-

tem

42. ABS MAIN1 10 A: Anti−lock brake sys-

tem

43. FR FOG 15 A: Fog lights

44. CHS W/P 10 A: CHS W/P

45. AMP 30 A: Audio system

46. PTC HTR2 30 A: PTC heater

47. PTC HTR1 30 A: PTC heater

48. CDS FAN 30 A: Electric cooling fan

49. DC/DS−S 5 A: Inverter and converter

50. MAIN 120 A: Hybrid system

318

319

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.

OWNERS

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 10

320

If you believe that your vehicle has

a defect which could cause a crash

or could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the Na-

tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad-

ministration (NHTSA) in addition to

notifying Toyota Motor Sales,

U.S.A., Inc. (Toll−free:

1−800−331−4331).

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety de-

fect exists in a group of vehicles, it

may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot

become involved in individual prob-

lems between you, your dealer, or

Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may either

call the Auto Safety Hotline toll−free

at 1−800−424−9393 (or 366−0123

in Washington, D.C. area) or write

to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of

Transportation, Washington, D.C.

20590. You can also obtain other

information about motor vehicle

safety from the Hotline.

Reporting safety defects for

U.S. owners

321

Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage

warnings

Throughout this manual, you will see safe-

ty and vehicle damage warnings. You

must follow these warnings carefully to

avoid possible injury or damage.

The types of warnings, what they look

like, and how they are used in this manu-

al are explained as follows:

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything

which may cause injury to people

if the warning is ignored. You are

informed about what you must or

must not do in order to reduce the

risk of injury to yourself and oth-

ers.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything

which may cause damage to the

vehicle or its equipment if the

warning is ignored. You are in-

formed about what you must or

must not do in order to avoid or

reduce the risk of damage to your

vehicle and its equipment.

Safety symbol

When you see the

safety symbol shown

above, it means: “Do

not...”; “Do not do

this”; or “Do not let

this happen”.

322

Important information about your Toyota

323

Occupant restraint sys-

tems

Toyota encourages you and your

family to take the time to read

Section 2−2 of this Owner’s Manu-

al carefully. In terms of helping

you understand how you can re-

ceive the maximum benefit of the

occupant restraint systems this ve-

hicle provides, Section 2−2 of this

Owner’s Manual is the most im-

portant section for you and your

family to read.

Section 2−2 describes the function

and operation concerning seats,

seat belts, SRS airbags and child

restraint systems of this vehicle

and some potential hazards you

should be aware of. These sys-

tems work together along with the

overall structure of this vehicle in

order to provide occupant restraint

in the event of a crash. The effect

of each system is enhanced when

it is used properly and together

with other systems. No single oc-

cupant restraint system can, by it-

self, provide you or your family

with the equal level of restraint

which these systems can provide

when used together. That is why it

is important for you and your fam-

ily to understand the purpose and

proper use of each of these sys-

tems and how they relate to each

other.

The purpose of all occupant re-

straint systems is to help reduce

the possibility of death or serious

injury in the event of a collision.

None of these systems, either in-

dividually or together, can ensure

that there is no injury in the event

of collision. However, the more

you know about these systems

and how to use them properly, the

greater your chances become of

surviving an accident without death

or serious injury.

Seat belts provide the primary re-

straint to all occupants of the ve-

hicle, and every occupant of the

vehicle should wear seat belts

properly at all times. Children

should always be secured in child

restraint systems that are ap-

propriate for their age and size.

SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem) airbags are, as their names

imply, designed to work with, and

be supplemental to, seat belts and

are not substitutes for them. SRS

airbags can be very effective in

reducing the risk of head and

chest injuries by preventing con-

tact of the head and chest with

interior portions of the vehicle.

324

325

In order to be effective, the SRS

airbags must deploy with tremen-

dous speed. The rapid deployment

of the SRS airbags makes the

SRS airbags themselves potential

sources of serious injury if an oc-

cupant is too close to an airbag,

or if an object or some part of his

or her body has been placed be-

tween the occupant and the airbag

at the time of deployment. This is

just one example of how the in-

structions in Section 2−2 of this

Owner’s Manual will help ensure

proper use of the occupant re-

straint systems, and increase the

safety they can provide to you

and your family in the event of an

accident.

Toyota recommends you to read

the provisions in Section 2−2 care-

fully and refer to them as needed

during your time of ownership of

this vehicle.

Event data recorder

Your vehicle has computers that

monitor and control certain as-

pects of your vehicle. These com-

puters assist in driving and main-

taining optimal vehicle perfor-

mance. Besides storing data useful

for troubleshooting, there is a sys-

tem to record data in a crash or

a near car crash event. This is

called an Event Data Recorder

(EDR).

The SRS airbag sensor assembly

contains the EDR. In a crash or a

near car crash event, this device

records some or all of the follow-

ing information:

DEngine speed

DWhether the brake pedal was

applied or not

DVehicle speed

DTo what extent the accelerator

pedal was depressed

DPosition of the transmission

selector lever

DWhether the driver and front

passenger wore the seat belts

or not

DDriver’s seat position

DFront passenger’s occupant

classification

326

327

DSRS airbag deployment data

DSRS airbag system diagnostic

data

The information above is intended

to be used for the purpose of im-

proving vehicle safety perfor-

mance. Unlike general data record-

ers, the EDR does not record

sound data such as conversation

between passengers.

Toyota will not disclose the data

recorded in an EDR to a third

party except when:

DAn agreement from the ve-

hicle’s owner (or the leasing

company for a leased vehicle)

is obtained

DOfficially requested by the po-

lice or other authorities

DUsed as a defence for Toyota

in a law suit

DOrdered by the court

However, if necessary Toyota will:

DUse the data for research on

Toyota vehicle safety perfor-

mance

DDisclose the data to a third

party for research purposes

without disclosing details of

the vehicle owner, and only

when it is deemed necessary

DDisclose summarized data

cleared of vehicle identifica-

tion information to a non−To-

yota organization for research

purposes

New vehicle warranty

Your new vehicle is covered by

the following Toyota limited war-

ranties:

DNew vehicle warranty

DEmission control systems war-

ranty

DOthers

For further information, please re-

fer to the “Owner’s Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet” or “Owner’s Manu-

al Supplement”.

Your responsibility for

maintenance

It is the owner’s responsibility to

make sure the specified mainte-

nance is performed. Section 7

gives details of these maintenance

requirements. Also included in

Section 7 is general maintenance.

For scheduled maintenance infor-

mation, please refer to the

“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or

“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

328

Important health and

safety

information about your

Toyota

CAUTION

DWARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-

ents, and a wide variety of automobile compo-

nents contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and birth de-

fects and other reproductive harm. In addition,

oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well

as waste produced by component wear contain or

emit chemicals known to the State of California

to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro-

ductive harm.

DBattery posts, terminals and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your

hands after handling. Used engine oil contains

chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory

animals. Always protect your skin by washing

thoroughly with soap and water.

329

Accessories, spare

parts and

modification of your

Toyota

A wide variety of non−genuine

spare parts and accessories for

Toyota vehicles are currently avail-

able in the market. You should

know that Toyota does not warrant

these products and is not respon-

sible for their performance, repair,

or replacement, or for any damage

they may cause to, or adverse ef-

fect they may have on, your Toyo-

ta vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modi-

fied with non−genuine Toyota

products. Modification with non−

genuine Toyota products could af-

fect its performance, safety or du-

rability, and may even violate gov-

ernmental regulations. In addition,

damage or performance problems

resulting from the modification may

not be covered under warranty.

330

Spark ignition system of

your Toyota

The spark ignition system in your

Toyota meets all requirements of

the Canadian Interference−Causing

Equipment Standard.

Installation of a mobile

two−way radio system

As the installation of a mobile

two−way radio system in your ve-

hicle could affect electronic sys-

tems such as multiport fuel injec-

tion system / sequential multiport

fuel injection system, cruise con-

trol system, anti−lock brake sys-

tem, vehicle stability control sys-

tem, SRS airbag system, seat belt

pretensioner system and Toyota

hybrid system, be sure to check

with your Toyota dealer for pre-

cautionary measures or special

instructions regarding installation.

Tires and loading on

your Toyota

Underinflated or overinflated

tire inflation pressure and the

excess load may result in the

deterioration of steering ability

and braking ability, leading to

an accident. Check the tire

inflation pressure periodically

and be sure to keep the load

limits given in this Owner’s

Manual. For details about tire

inflation pressure and load lim-

its, see page 291 and pages

228.

331

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pre-

tensioner devices in your Toyota

contain explosive chemicals. If the

vehicle is scrapped with the airbags

and pretensioners left as they are,

this may cause an accident such as

fire. Be sure to have the systems

of the SRS airbag and seat belt

pretensioner removed and disposed

of by the qualified service shop or

by your Toyota dealer before you

dispose of your vehicle.

CAUTION

When your vehicle or bat-

tery needs to be disposed

of, be sure to consult your

Toyota dealer. Hybrid ve-

hicle batteries must be

collected through Toyota

dealers. If your vehicle is

disposed of without dis-

mantling, someone could

receive an electric shock

by touching the high volt-

age parts of the hybrid ve-

hicle battery. If the battery

is not disposed of proper-

ly, its contents can cause

death or serious injury.

Hybrid vehicle battery

The hybrid vehicle battery has a

limited service life. Call your Toyo-

ta dealer for information about re-

cycling or disposal of hybrid ve-

hicle battery and your vehicle.

332

CAUTION

333

Precautions for use

of hybrid vehicle

The vehicle has both high voltage

DC and AC systems as well as a

12−volt system. DC and AC high

voltage are both very dangerous

and can cause death or serious inju-

ry, severe burns and electric shock.

DIn order to avoid personal in-

juries, do not touch the high

voltage cables (orange col-

ored) and their connectors.

DFollow the caution labels at-

tached to the high voltage

parts.

DDo not remove or replace the

high voltage parts such as

the inverter unit (located in

the engine compartment), hy-

brid vehicle battery (located

behind rear seat), etc.

DDo not touch the service plug

located in the left side trim

of the luggage compartment

without hybrid system techni-

cal training. (See “Precau-

tions for use” on page 14 in

Section 1−2.) This component

is provided to disable the

high voltage system in case

of servicing at a Toyota deal-

er.

CAUTION If an accident occurs

DPull your vehicle off the road,

push the “P” position switch,

stop the hybrid system and if

the key is inserted into key

slot, remove it.

DIn order to avoid personal in-

juries, do not touch any high

voltage wirings and their con-

nectors, and high voltage

parts (inverter unit, hybrid ve-

hicle battery, etc.).

DIf some exposed electric

wires are protruding inside or

outside of your vehicle, an

electric shock may occur.

Never touch the electric

wires.

DIf fluid leaks or gets in some

parts of the vehicle, never

touch it because it may be

electrolyte (strong alkali) from

the hybrid vehicle battery. If

it gets into your skin or eyes,

wash off immediately with a

large amount of water, if pos-

sible, boric acid solution, and

get immediate medical atten-

tion in order to help avoid

serious injury.

DIf a vehicle fire occurs, extin-

guish it using a fire extin-

guisher for the exclusive use

on electric fires. Or, use a

large amount of water to pre-

vent flammable gas from be-

ing generated from the batter-

ies.

334

DIf your vehicle needs to be

towed, do it with the front

wheels raised. For details on

towing, see “If your vehicle

needs to be towed” on page

258 in Section 5.

335

CAUTION

High Voltage

Your vehicle is equipped with

cables connected to parts of

the vehicle subject to high volt-

age (about 500 V at maximum).

There are some other parts that

reach high temperatures while

you drive. Never touch battery

cables (wrapped in orange−col-

ored harnesses) or their con-

nectors since they are under

high voltage and dangerous.

Caution labels are applied to

these parts to identify them.

Carefully observe the instruc-

tions on these caution labels.

00p001

Publication No. OM47509U

Part No. 01999-47509

Printed in Japan 01−0409−00

U−7

Quick index

DIf a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on 117. . .

DIf your vehicle will not start 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIf your vehicle overheats 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIf you have a flat tire 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIf your vehicle needs to be towed 258. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DTips for driving during break-in period 204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DHow to start the hybrid system 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DGeneral maintenance 273. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gas station information

Fuel type:

UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91)

or higher.

See page 204 for detailed information.

Fuel tank capacity:

45 L (11.9 gal., 9.9 lmp.gal.)

See page 206 for detailed information.

Engine oil:

API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil

is recommended.

See page 287 for detailed information.

Tire information: See pages 291 through 298.

Tire inflation pressure: See page 315.

OM47509U

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation